Home

User Manual - ACP & D, Ltd.

Contents

1. External supply 25 UO Board dependent D Run Fwd Set Digital Input 2 28 Parameter 362 9 Run GR Reverse 3 Wire Control No Changes Required Internal supply Q Ll O O Start 3 Wire Control Neutral 115V No Changes Required External supply ERES CLE I O Board dependent L Requires 3 wire functions only Digital Int Sell 5 Using 2 wire selections will GL cause a type 2 alarm page SV Digital Output Power Source Select Source to Activate Relays shown in powered A er SO Parameters 380 384 state with drive faulted See 22212 SE A Fault pages 1 18 8 1 17 IE gt A NOT Fault pm Ende 14 16 as SRL NOT Pun y 10 706 24 rj Run Vector Control 2 relays at terminals 14 16 o Enable Input Guy Standard Control Li Configure with parameter 366 n Vector Control D Configure with parameter 366 DB Ho For dedicated hardware Enable o Remove Jumper J10 see 1 19 Important Programming inputs for 2 wire control deactivates all HIM Start buttons 1 22 Installation Wiring Reference Contro
2. 100 0 m s so 3 u PI Output po H 50 0 2 75 0 100 4100 0 75 0 50 0 25 0 00 250 50 0 750 1000 Spd Cmd Normalized Feedback Pre load to Command Speed PI Kp PI ExcessErr Pl Neg Limit e N ras Nr CH PIXS Error PI Pos Limit oA PI Ref Sel HC pne Y me 54 2 y Pl Cmd iB m ol m 20 XO PI Output vy li gt HPG PZ SC S IW Bee Don p Invert aw 3 a z Ly PL Status 7 Hold T 1 PI Fbk Sel x gt nm Spd Cmd T T A PI Config PI Config Sart Exclusive Current Limit or Volt Limit Situs Pi Config Enabled SpdReg PI Config ZeroClamp Preload Value Ly Dr A amp J Spd Cmd Y Y 732K Spd Ref j Linear Ramp PI Config a TN as cune Ser pP rrr e PreloadCmd IH PI Status d 432K Enabled erg gt LLK SpdCmd TT U 0 PL Config ye bl Torq Trim 0 EC aaron Al Y 4800 d gt 4800 Torq Ref A Lt Torq cmd Vector Control Option Torq Ref B C 16 Application Notes Reverse Speed Limit Figure C 6 Rev Speed Limit parameter 454 set to zero 10V Maximum Speed H Reverse Forward Speed y Speed l Minimum Speed 0 Maximum i Speed 1 i
3. Name Color State Description OQ PWR Green Steady Illuminates when power is applied to the drive Power O STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running and no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing A start inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be See page Drive Stopped started Check parameter 214 Start Inhibits 4 10 Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing Fault has occurred Check Fault x Code or Fault Queue See page 4 4 Steady A non resettable fault has occurred 6 PORT Refer to the Communication Status of DPI port internal communications if present MOD Adapter User Manual Status of communications module when installed NET A Status of network if connected NETB Status of secondary network if connected Start Up 2 3 Start Up Routines The PowerFlex 700 is designed so that start up is simple and efficient If you have an LCD HIM three methods are provided allowing the user to select the desired level needed for the application e SMART Start This routine allows you to quickly set up the drive by programming values for the most commonly used functions below and page 2 4 e Assisted Start Up This routine
4. moza o 5 4l 125 200 HP Normal Duty M8 Stud All Terminals Max Lug Width 25 4 mm 1 in Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP 15A14F l BR2 an DC Dc Common Bus Drives re SOT wPrecharge Only A o olor o IE jo a O o o Wes use7sc COPPER WIRE ony U Y W PE Pr T T2 T3 L PR OUTPUT I J 1 12 gt Installation Wiring Terminal Description Notes BR1 DC Brake DB Resistor Connection Important Only one DB BR2 DC Brake resistor can be used with Frames 0 3 Connecting an internal 8 external resistor could cause damage DC DC Bus DC DC Bus PE PE Ground Refer to Figure 1 3 for location on 3 Frame drives 4 Motor Ground Refer to Figure 1 3 for location on 3 Frame drives U U T1 To motor V V T2 To motor W W T3 To motor R R L1 AC Line Input Power S S L2 Three Phase R S amp T T T L3 Single Phase R amp S Only PS AUX Auxiliary Control Voltage see Table 1 C PS AUX Auxiliary Control Voltage see Table 1 C Using Input Output Contactors Input Contactor Precautions ATTENTION A co
5. JU mA PS O un SU EA N 70 0 28 Lifting Holes 3 Places o 5 4 Places Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 2 kg Ibs Drive amp Packaging 29 08 64 0 4 220 0 8 66 758 8 29 87 201 7 7 94 192 0 7 56 DEIN 24 49 54 0 t Refer to Table A for frame information 0 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 5 PowerFlex 700 Frame 5 _ lt 6 5 0 26 A 87 6 1 48 lt 259 1 10 20 gt lt 5 0 0 59 oa lt D gt Detail C Se A A O O 8 E o Ho TTT L B E el E E Power J 000000000002000000000000000000 H 1 H Dose H o9 E Y n A l A A 6 5 0 26 Lifting PEO 12 5 TA 0 49 Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Approx Weight 2 kg Ibs A 17 625 0 24 61 137 19 82 0 1 Refer to Table A l for frame information 0 Weights include HIM and Standard I O Drive amp Packaging 42 18 93 0 3 When using the supplied junction box 100 HP drives Only add an additional 45 1 mm 1 78 in to this dimension A 18 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 6 PowerFlex 700 Frame 6
6. 100 2 76 lt 75 9 2 99 gt lt 96 0 3 78 All 167 5 6 59 156 9 6 18 22 4 0 88 Dia 2 Places 287 1 18 Dia 3 Places 157 5 6 20 150 9 594 1124 441 393 155 lt 57 2 2 25 gt 72 7 2 86 lt 106 0 4 17 lt _ 139 4 5 49 177 4 6 98 A 20 Supplemental Drive Information Frame Rating Dimensions 3 All lt 1053 4 15 gt excepi t 22 2 0 87 Dia 947 8 73 gt E An Dia 50 HP 287 1 13 Dia 480V 2Places x 87 kW 400V 1845 165 1 728 6 50 160 1 151 1 6 30 6 95 1277 5 03 Y 22 7 0 89 Le 29 0 1 14 I 66 0 2 60 gt lt 97 0 8 82 e 137 2 6 40 ___ gt lt 187 0 7 36 50 HP lt 105 3 4 15 gt B sd Dia 480V lt 941 3 73 gt 46 7 1 84 Dia 2 Places 37 kW 28 7 1 13 Dia i 400V 2 Places Normal Len Duty E 1845 i 7 26 Drive i W 160 1 6 30 1277 6 03 Vent Plate 227 089 lt 290 1 14 lt gt 66 0 2 60 gt 190 0 6 12 gt 186 0 7 32 4
7. Slide the cassette out O Figure 1 6 PowerFlex 700 Typical Cassette amp I O Terminal Blocks 1 0 Terminal Blocks Table 1 G 1 0 Terminal Block Specifications Remove screws securing cassette cover to gain access to the boards 1 2 Not available with Standard Control option Wire Size Range Torque No Name Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended O O Cassette Removable UO Cassette 1 0 Terminal Signal amp control 2 1 mm 0 30 mm 0 6N m 0 6 N m Block connections 14 AWG 22 AWG 5 2 Ib in 5 2 Ib in Encoder Encoder power amp signal 0 75 mm 0 196 mm 0 6 N m 0 6 N m Terminal Block connections 18 AWG 24 AWG 5 2 Ib in 5 2 Ib in Maximum minimum that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations Installation Wiring 1 17 Figure 1 7 Standard Control Option UO Terminal Designations gt O ER SS Signal A Description co Anlg Volts In 1 2 Isolated 9 bipolar differential 320 10V 11 bit amp sign 88k ohm input 327 Anlg Volts In 1 impedance Anlg Volts In 2 2 Isolated 4 bipolar differential Anlg Volts In 2 10V 11 bit amp sign 88k ohm input impedance Pot Common For and 10V pot references Anlg Volts Out 1 Bipolar 10V
8. A A e dese SES ee Ser EIZ NNS AZA VVD SLY S 7 19 7 OSI SS EE EE x o o o o ti1 1 1 x 1 1 1 1 1 1 pr s 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later Factory Default Bit Values Alarm Clear Default 0 Ready Resets all Alarm 1 8 Code parameters Options 0 Ready to zero 1 Clr Alrm Que Alarm 1 Code Default Read Only Alarm 2 Code Min Max 0 65535 Alarm 3 Code Units 1 Alarm 4 Code l Alarm 5 Code Alarm 6 Code Alarm 7 Code Alarm 8 Code A code that represents a drive alarm The codes will appear in the order they occur first 4 alarms in first 4 out alarm queue A time stamp is not available with alarms 3 47 Related IND gt IND IND Io IND IN o ee IND Io IN o GA IND Io o no a NI IND IO co IN o ico IND lo ek 3 48 Group Scaled Blocks Programming and Parameters 477 483 489 495 478 484 490 496 479 485 491 497 480 486 492 498 481 487 493 499 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Scale1 In Value Scale2 In Value Scale3 In Value Scale4 In Value Displays the value of the signal being sent to ScaleX In Value using a link 1 Blocks 3 amp 4 only Scale1 In Hi Scale2 In Hi Scale3 In Hi Scale4 In Hi Scales the upper value of ScaleX In Value 1 Bloc
9. A 4 Output Devices 000 A 7 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings A 7 Dimensions 000 A 15 Frame Cross Reference A 22 Appendix B HIM Overview External and Internal Connections B 1 LCD Display Elements B 2 ALT Functions arar pia B 2 Menu Structure e nnnna n B 3 Viewing and Editing Parameters B 5 Linking Parameters Vector Option Only B 6 Removing Installing the HIM B 8 Appendix C Application Notes External Brake Resistor C 1 Lifting Torque Proving C 2 Minimum Speed C 7 Motor Control Technology C 8 Motor Overload n on nnaaaaaanaaa C 10 Overspeed A a e AER dR d dte C 11 Power Loss Ride Through C 12 Process PI for Standard Control C 13 Reverse Speed Limit C 16 Skip Frequency naaa naasna C 17 Sleep Wake Mode C 19 Start At PowerUp C 21 SOP Modes orien em PERS C 22 Voltage Tolerance C 24 Index Preface Overview The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the basic information needed to install start up and troubleshoot the PowerFlex 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive For information on See page Who Should Use this Manual P 1 What Is Not in this Manual P 1 Reference Materials P 2 Manual Conventions P 2 Drive Frame Sizes P 3 General Precautions P 3 C
10. eo D HI HI a N Programming and Parameters 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values PI Feedback Sel Default 2 Analog In 2 Selects the source of the Pl feedback Options See PI Reference Sel PI Integral Time Default 2 00 Secs Time required for the integral component Min Max 0 00 100 00 Secs to reach 100 of PI Error Meter Not Units 0 01 Secs functional when the PI Hold bit of PI Control 1 enabled PI Prop Gain Default 1 0 Sets the value for the PI proportional Min Max 0 00 100 00 component Units 0 01 PI Error x PI Prop Gain PI Output PI Lower Limit Default Maximum Freq Sets the lower limit of the PI output 100 Min Max 400 0 Hz 800 0 Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 PI Upper Limit Default Maximum Freq Sets the upper limit of the PI output 100 Min Max 400 0 Hz 800 0 Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 PI Preload Default 0 0 Hz Sets the value used to preload the 100 0 integral component on start or enable Min Max Pl Lower Limit PI Upper Limit Units 0 1Hz 0 1 PI Status Read Only Status of the Process Pl regulator he E CAE 1 Condition True X XIX X XIXIX X XIX X x 010 0 0 a te pits 14 18 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ST a Bit PI Ref Meter Default Read Only Present value of the Pl reference signal
11. 40 to 70 degrees C 40 to 158 degrees F Atmosphere Important Drive must not be installed in an area where the ambient atmosphere contains volatile or corrosive gas vapors or dust If the drive is not going to be installed for a period of time it must be stored in an area where it will not be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere Relative Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Shock 15G peak for 11ms duration 1 0 ms Vibration 0 152 mm 0 006 in displacement 1G peak Sound Fan Sound Note Sound pressure level is Frame Speed Level measured at 2 meters 0 30 CFM 58 dB 1 30 CFM 59 dB 2 50 CFM 57 dB 3 120 CFM 61 dB 4 190 CFM 59 dB 5 200 CFM 71 dB 6 300 CFM 72 dB Voltage Tolerance See page C 24 for full power and operating range Frequency Tolerance 47 63 Hz Input Phases Three phase input provides full rating for all drives Single phase operation provides 50 of rated current Displacement Power Factor 0 98 across entire speed range Efficiency 97 5 at rated amps nominal line volts Maximum Short Circuit Rating 200 000 Amps symmetrical Actual Short Circuit Rating Method Determined by AIC rating of installed fuse circuit breaker Sine coded PWM with programmable carrier frequency Ratings apply to all drives refer to the Derating Guidelines in the PowerFlex Reference Manual The drive can be supplied as 6 pulse or 12
12. o er LI 000 HHH o ia oo G m ooeooooooooooQ U sH San lof R a LA L lle Frames 0 amp 1 Frame 2 I O Cassette Removed o Eag IHL M m ooooo 8 110000 3 00009 gH O9990 e Oooog Il o El Sch a AXN BRIBR2 DC DC UT V T2 WIT3 DU SU T3 le EE ei IE n 8 I e 9 PE E ik Ta S868 e e Le S olojolololololo 7 D SHLD o i AS amp L J T s o Hi 7 l i N i N Important Do Not discard or replace grounding hardware 16 Frame 5 Frames 3 amp 4 A A Installation Wiring 1 15 1 0 Wiring Important points to remember about I O wiring e Use Copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 degrees C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire e Wire with an insulation rating of 600
13. Allen Bradley U Power sx Adjustable Frequency AC Series A e rive Standard and Vector Control Firmware Versions Standard Control xxx x 3 001 Vector Control xxx x 3 002 User Manual Automation Important User Information Solid state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment Safety Guidelines for the Application Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls Publication SGI 1 1 available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or www rockwellautomation com literature describes some important differences between solid state equipment and hard wired electromechanical devices Because of this difference and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid state equipment all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable In no event will Rockwell Automation Inc be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation Rockwell Automation Inc cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation Inc with respect
14. Options 0 0 Secs 0 0 90 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 450 0 5000 1 Adjust Freq Both Frq 1st 1 4 0 Disabled 1 Adjust Freq 2 Dynamic Brak 3 Both DB 1st 4 Both Frq 1st ATTENTION The drive does not offer protection for externally mounted brake resistors A risk of fire exists if external braking resistors are not protected External resistor packages must be self protected from over temperature or the protective circuit shown in Figure C 1 on page C 1 or equivalent must be supplied 3 33 Related I lon 5 K yl mi SE kek ja INS a BB 3 34 Programming and Parameters mo m Parameter Name amp Description 5 it See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 163 DB Resistor Type Default 0 Internal Res 161 Selects whether the internal or an E None external DB resistor will be used Options 0 Internal Res Important In 0 3 Frame drives only one ue Res DB resistor can be connected to the one drive Connecting both an internal amp external resistor could cause damage If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the drive Bus Reg Mode A amp B must be set to either option 2 3 or 4 SS ATTENTION Equipment damage may result if a drive mounted 2 internal resistor is installed and this parameter is set to External 3 Res or None Thermal protection for the internal resistor will be El disabled re
15. Static or Rotate Autotune procedure Param 061 page 3 17 Cause s Motor data was incorrectly entered None or Autotune was not performed Drive will not reverse motor direction Cause s Indication Corrective Action Digital input is not selected for None Check Digital Inx Sel page 3 57 Choose reversing control correct input and program for reversing mode Digital input is incorrectly wired None Check input wiring See page 1 15 Direction mode parameter is None Reprogram Direction Mode page 3 38 for incorrectly programmed analog Bipolar or digital Unipolar control Motor wiring is improperly phased None Switch two motor leads for reverse A bipolar analog speed command None 1 Use meter to check that an analog input input is incorrectly wired or signal is voltage is present absent 2 Check wiring See page 1 15 Positive voltage commands forward direction Negative voltage commands reverse direction Troubleshooting 4 15 Stopping the drive results in a Decel Inhibit fault Cause s Indication Corrective Action The bus regulation feature is Decel Inhibitfault 1 See Attention statement on page P 4 enabled and is halting deceleration screen 2 Reprogram parameters 161 162 to due to excessive bus voltage LCD Status Line eliminate any Adjust Freq selection Excess bus voltage is normally due indicates 3 Disable bus regulation parameters 161 amp
16. o o ak I gt o1 Io o o ki 3 18 Programming and Parameters cs o E Parameter Name amp Description S ic amp Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values oc 066 Autotune Torque Default 50 0 053 9 Specifies motor torque applied to the Min Max 0 0 150 0 motor during the flux current and inertia Units 0 1 tests performed during an autotune 067 Inertia Autotune Default 0 Ready 053 9 Provides an automatic method of setting Options 0 Ready 450 Total Inertia This test is automatically 1 Inertia Tune run during Start Up motor tests Important Use when motor is coupled to the load Results may not be valid if the load is not coupled to the motor during this procedure Ready Parameter returns to this setting following a completed inertia tune Inertia Tune A temporary command that initiates an inertia test of the motor load combination The motor will ramp up and down while the drive measures the amount of inertia 427 Torque Ref A Sel Default 1 Torque Setpt 053 P 431 Torque Ref B Sel 24 Disabled 2 8 Selects the source of the external torque Options 0 Torque Setpt 5 2 reference to the drive How this reference Torque Stptt 2 SE is used is dependent upon Speed 1 Analog In 1 g Torque Mod 2 Analog In 2 SE 1 See Appendix B tor DPI port locations S 17 Reserved vm 2 Vector firmware 3 0
17. 100 75 60 90 75 150 125 125 110 90 HIM Overview Appendix B For information on See page For information on See page External and Internal Connections B 1 Menu Structure B 3 LCD Display Elements B 2 Viewing and Editing BE Parameters ALT Functions B 2 Removing Installing the B 8 HIM External and Internal Connections The PowerFlex 700 provides a number of cable connection points 0 Frame shown SH SE ECH DANGER UE es OS lobor ER clm pA ege RESH Ti Iis Communications SCH m UUUUU Module ER I ee a m ERIN Da z ill T Legd D NS 1 U n o S L2 t U role 100000 Ro Fe J e TX GM A L fl No Connector Description O DPI Port 1 HIM connection when installed in cover DPI Port2 Cable connection for handheld and remote options DPI Port 3 or 2 Splitter cable connected to DPI Port 2 provides additional port DPIPort5 Cable connection for communications adapter B 2 HIM Overview LCD Displ
18. 125 kbps 1 500 kbps 1 500 kbps Read Only 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved Read Only 32767 4 Read Only 1 32767 4 3 49 Related 3 50 File COMMUNICATION Group No Comm Control Masks Owners Programming and Parameters 274 275 298 299 276 277 Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions DPI Port Sel Selects which DPI port reference value will appear in DPI Port Value DPI Port Value Value of the DPI reference selected in DPI Port Sel DPI Ref Select Scales DPI on maximum frequency or maximum speed DPI Fdbk Select Selects DPI units displayed on the Fdbk line of the HIM 1 Vector firmware 3 001 and later 2 Refer to Input Output Definitions on page 3 56 Logic Mask Values Default Options Default Units Default Options Default Options Min Max DPI Port 1 1 5 DPI Port 1 5 Read Only 32767 A 0 Max Freq 0 Max Freq 1 Max Speed 17 Speed Fdbk 0 Output Freq 1 Command Freq 1 Command Spd 2 Output Amps 3 Torque Amps 4 Flux Amps 5 Output Power 6 X Output Volts 7 DC Bus Volts 8 PI Reference 9 PI Feedback 10 PI Error 11 Pl Output 12 Motor OL 13 Drive OL 14 CommandedTrq 15 MtrTrqCurRef e 16 Spe
19. 49 6261 9410 Fax 49 6261 17741 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 55 Newton Road 11 01 02 Revenue House Singapore 307987 Tel 65 6356 9077 Fax 65 6356 9011 U S Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Tel 1 262 512 8176 Fax 1 262 512 2222 Email support drives ra rockwell com Online www ab com support abdrives Publication 20B UM001G EN P August 2004 P N 195670 P07 Supersedes 20B UMO001F EN P dated December 2003 Copyright O 2004 Rockwell Automation Inc All rights reserved Printed in USA
20. Adapter that is presently clearing a fault MOP Owner Adapters that are currently issuing increases or decreases in MOP command frequency Local Owner Adapter that has requested exclusive control of all drive logic functions If an adapter is in local lockout all other functions except stop on all other adapters are locked out and non functional Local control can only be obtained when the drive is not running Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Parameter number whose value will be written from a communications device data table Standard Control Parameters that can only be changed while drive is stopped cannot be used as Datalink inputs Entering a parameter of this type will Disable the link Vector Control Will not be updated until drive is stopped Refer to your communications option manual for datalink information Data In B1 Link B Word 1 Data In B2 Link B Word 2 Values See Stop Owner See Stop Owner See Stop Owner See Stop Owner See Stop Owner See Stop Owner See Stop Owner Default Min Max 0 0 Disabled 0 387 0 544 0 611 II Units 1 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data In A2 Link A Word 2 Related Programming and Parameters 3 53 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Data In C1 Link C Word 1 See Data In A1 Link A W
21. Communication File 271 272 273 Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions DPI Data Rate Sets the baud rate for attached drive peripherals When changing this value the drive must be reset for the change to take affect DPI Baud Rate See description above Drive Logic Rslt Programming and Parameters Values Default Options Default The final logic command resulting from the combination of all DPI and discrete inputs This parameter has the same structure as the product specific logic command received via DPI and is used in peer to peer communications Bist 14 13 112 Description 0 0 O NoCommand Man Mode o 0 Ref A Auto 0 1 JO RefBAuto O 1 1 Preset3 Auto 1 0 JO Preset 4 Auto 1 0 1 Preset 5 Auto 1 1 0 Preset 6 Auto 1 1 1 Preset 7 Auto Drive Ref Rslt Default Present frequency reference scaled as a Min Max DPI reference for peer to peer Units communications The value shown is the value prior to the accel decel ramp and the corrections supplied by slip comp PI etc Drive Ramp Rslt Default Present frequency reference scaled as a Min Max DPI reference for peer to peer Units communications The value shown is the value after the accel decel ramp but prior to any corrections supplied by slip comp Pl etc 0 125 kbps 0
22. External control power UL Installation 300V DC 10 Non UL Installation 270 600V DC 10 0 3 Frame 40 W 165 mA 5 Frame 80 W 90 mA 1 10 Installation Wiring Figure 1 3 Typical Power Terminal Block Location Us il Eos oe um vm WER us o TI 2 PE Frame 2 6000 e e Frames 0 4 1 Frame 5 Common Bus Drives Only Frame 6 Figure 1 4 Power Terminal Block Terminal Block eeeoeoooooo0292o929 NW Cy y Cy BRI BR2DC DC U V W 4 PE R S T T1 T2 T3 t0 L2 L3 EE 480V AC Inp BRI BR2 DC D
23. Group Page Parameter Name Number Group Page Fault Amps 225 Diagnostics 3 44 Motor OL Factor 48 Motor Data 3 15 Fault Bus Volts 226 Diagnostics 3 44 Motor OL Hertz 47 Motor Data 3 15 Fault Clear 240 Faults 3 46 Motor Poles 49 Motor Data 3 15 Fault Clear Mode 241 Faults 3 46 Motor Type 40 Motor Data 3 14 Fault Clr Mask 283 Masks A Owners 3 51 Mtr NP Pwr Units 46 Motor Data 3 15 Fault Clr Owner 295 Masks 8 Owners 3 52 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 441 Torq Attributes 3 19 Fault Config 1 238 Faults 3 46 Neg Torque Limit 437 Torq Attributes 3 19 Fault Frequency 224 Diagnostics 3 44 Notch Filter Freq 419 Speed Feedback 3 20 Fault Speed 224 Diagnostics 3 44 Notch Filter K 420 Speed Feedback 3 21 Fdbk Filter Sel 416 Speed Feedback 3 20 Output Current 3 Metering 3 12 Feedback Select 80 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 Output Freq 1 Metering 3 12 Float Tolerance 606 Torq Proving 3 60 Output Power 7 Metering 3 12 Flux Braking 166 Stop Brake Modes 3 34 Output Powr Fetr 8 Metering 3 12 Flux Current 5 Metering 3 12 Output Voltage 6 Metering 3 12 Flux Current Ref 63 Torq Attributes 3 17 Overspeed Limit 83 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 Flux Up Mode 57 Torq Attributes 3 16 Param Access Lvl 196 Drive Memory 3 39 Flux Up Time 58 Torq Attributes 3 16 PI BW Filter 139 Process PI 3 29 Flying Start En 169 Restart Modes 3 35 PI Configuration 124 Process PI 3 27 Flying StartGain 170 Restart Modes 3 35 PI Control 125 Process PI 3 27 Gnd Warn Level 177
24. Min Max 100 0 Units 0 1 PI Fdback Meter Default Read Only Present value of the Pl feedback signal Min Max 100 0 Units 0 1 a ep La Bam IGO c L La ep kal i ja gam gam Io c L IO c Hm D ES lt o D TT W a N Speed Regulator 138 139 459 460 461 462 463 445 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions PI Error Meter Present value of the PI error PI Output Meter Present value of the PI output PI BW Filter Firmware 2 001 amp later Provides filter for Process PI error signal The output of this filter is displayed in PI Error Meter Zero will disable the filter PI Deriv Time Refer to formula below E dpi Error Plou KD Sec x TR PI Reference Hi Scales the upper value of PI Reference Sel of the source PI Reference Lo Scales the lower value of PI Reference Sel of the source PI Feedback Hi Scales the upper value of PI Feedback of the source PI Feedback Lo Scales the lower value of PI Feedback of the source Ki Speed Loop Controls the integral error gain of the speed regulator The drive automatically adjusts Ki Speed Loop when a non zero value is entered for Speed Desired BW or an autotune is performed Typically manual adjustment of this parameter is needed only if system inertia cannot be determined through an autotune Speed Desired BW
25. Replace I O Board Standard Control or Main Control Board Vector Control Verify configuration Check incoming power for a missing phase blown fuse Re enter motor nameplate data Check for proper motor sizing Check for correct programming of Motor NP Volts parameter 41 3 Additional output impedance may be required 1 Verify connections between motor and load Verify level and time requirements An excessive motor load exists Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by Motor NP FLA Verify that thermistor is connected Motor is overheated Reduce load Cycle power and repeat function Replace Main Control Board Cycle power and repeat function Replace Main Control Board Pp 2 Fault Output PhaseLoss OverSpeed Limit OverVoltage Parameter Chksum Params Defaulted Phase U to Grnd Phase V to Grnd Phase W to Grnd Phase UV Short Phase VW Short Phase UW Short Port 1 5 DPI Loss Port 1 5 Adapter No a 100 71 75 Typel Description Current in one or more phases has been lost or remains below a preset level Functions such as Slip Compensation or Bus Regulation have attempted to add an output frequency adjustment greater than that programmed in Overspeed Limit DC bus voltage exceeded maximum value The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated The drive was commanded
26. Torque Setpt 1 361 Selects Torque Stpt1 for Torque Ref A Sel when set otherwise uses value selected in Torque Ref A Sel Programming and Parameters 3 57 Kal oD Parameter Name amp Description S See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E Digital In1 Sel Default 4 Stop CF Digital In2 Sel Default 5 Start Digital In3 Sel Default 18 Auto Manual Digital In4 Sel Default 15 Speed Sel 1 Digital In5 Sel Default 16 Speed Sel 2 Digital In6 Sel Default 17 Speed Sel 3 Selects the function for the digital inputs Options 0 Nat Used 1 Speed Select Inputs 1 Enable 810 2 Clear Faults CF 4 3 2 i Auto Reference Source 3 Aux Fault 0 fo o Reference A 4 Stop CF 10 0 0 1 Reference B 5 gamb 9 0 1 O PresetSpeed2 5 0 i II Preset Speed 3 oa 1 0 0 Preset Speed 4 un 1 0 1 PresetSpeed5 8 Run Forward 6 1 1 O PresetSpeed6 9 Run Reverse 6 1 i 1 Preset Speed 7 10 Jog 6 Jog1 2 100 To access Preset Speed 1 set Speed 11 Jog Forward 6 Ref x Sel to Preset Speed 1 12 Jog Reverse 9 Type 2 Alarms Some digital input 13 Stop Mode B 156 programming may cause conflicts that 14 Bus Reg Md B 162 will result in a Type 2 alarm Example 1517 Speed Sel 1 3 1 Digital In1 Sel set to 5 Start in 3 wire 18 Auto M pO 96 wn control and Digital In2 Sel set to 7
27. releases brake Important If the direction of travel is critical at this point perform short jogs to determine which run direction RUNFWD or RUNREV should be used in the next steps 4 Press Start and run the drive in the desired direction Observe the direction of motor rotation Tf rotation is not in the desired direction remove drive power and reverse the two motor leads or set bit 5 of Compensation parameter 56 to Mtr Lead Rev 5 With the drive running observe Encoder Speed parameter 415 If the sign of the encoder is not the same as the displayed frequency remove drive power and reverse encoder leads A and A NOT 6 With the drive running verify correct motor rotation and encoder direction Set Motor Fdbk Type parameter 412 to 1 Quad Check Stop the drive C4 A Application Notes Rotate AutoTune Test ATTENTION In this test the following conditions will occur e The motor will be run for 12 seconds at base frequency 60 Hz Note that equipment travel during this 12 second interval may exceed equipment limits However travel distance can be reduced by setting Maximum Speed parameter 82 to a value less than 45 Hz i e 22 5 Hz 12 seconds at 30 Hz e The brake will be released without torque provided by the drive for 15 seconds To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage this test should not be performed if either of the above conditions are
28. 4 7 Parameter Chksum 4 7 Params Defaulted 4 7 Phase Short 4 7 Phase to Grnd 4 7 Port 1 5 DPI Loss 4 7 Power Loss 4 8 Power Unit 4 8 Pulse In Loss 4 8 Pwr Brd Chksum 4 8 Pwr Brd Chksum2 4 8 Replaced MCB PB 4 8 Shear Pin 4 8 Software 4 8 SW OverCurrent 4 8 TorgPrv Spd Band 4 8 Trnsistr OvrTemp 4 8 UnderVoltage 4 9 UserSet Chksum 4 9 Faults Cleared Fault 4 5 Faults Group 3 46 Faults Clearing 4 4 Fdbk Filter Sel 3 20 Feedback Select 3 22 FGP 3 3 File Applications 3 59 Communication 3 49 Dynamic Control 3 31 Inputs amp Outputs 3 53 Monitor 3 12 Motor Control 3 14 Speed Command 3 21 Utility 3 38 File Group Parameter 3 3 Filter RFI 1 4 First Environment Installations 1 26 Float Tolerance 3 60 Fit QueueCleared Fault 4 5 ux Braking 3 34 lux Current 3 12 lux Current Ref 3 17 ux Up Mode 3 16 ux Up Time 3 16 ux Vector Control Option 3 3 uxAmpsRef Rang Alarm 4 11 uxAmpsRef Rang Fault 4 5 ying Start En 3 35 ying StartGain 3 35 Frame Designations A 7 Frame Size Drive P 3 Functions ALT Key B 2 Fuses mn 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n Input 1 5 Ratings A 7 G General Precautions P 3 Gnd Warn Level 3 37 Ground Fault 4 5 Ground Warn Alarm 4 11 Grounding Bus 1 4 Conductor 1 4 Filter 1 4 General 1 4 Impedance 1 4 Safety PE 1 4 Shields 1 4 Group Alarms 3 47 Analog Inputs 3 53 Analog Outputs 3 54 Comm Control 3 49 Datalinks 3
29. Configures Enter Motor NP Optimize Torque Set Min Max Configure Configure Configure Motor Control Data Stop Mode and Speed and Source Value Control Method for Specific Method Accel Decel Verify Direction Direction Control and Scale for 2 Wire 3 Wire VO Application Ramp Times Speed References Digital Inputs Outputs and Analog Outputs 1 See page 2 4 2 4 Start Up 1 During Motor Tests and tuning procedures the drive may modify certain parameter values for proper Start Up operation These values are then reset to their original values when Start Up is complete The affected parameters are 053 080 276 278 and 361 366 If power is removed from the drive during the tests without aborting the auto tune procedure these parameters may not be reset to their original value If this situation occurs reset the drive to factory defaults and repeat the Start Up procedure Step 1 Press ALT and then Esc S M A R T The S M A R T start screen appears C9 c 2 View and change parameter values as desired For HIM information see SMART List Appendix B Digital In2 Sel Step 1 In the Main Menu press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Start Up O LY 2 Press Enter a Hz Running S M A R T Start During a Start Up the majority of applications require changes to only a few parameters The LCD HIM on a PowerFlex 700 drive offers S M A R T start which displays the most commonly changed parameters With these param
30. Debut 1 0 e Defines the value of the multiplier for the Min Max 32767 0 e Torque Ref B Sel selection Units 0 1 Description File Lists the major parameter file category Group Lists the parameter group within a file No U o e No Parameter number 8 Parameter value can not be changed until drive is stopped W 32 bit parameter in the Standard Control option All parameters in the Vector Control option are 32 bit Parameter only displayed when Motor Cntl Sel is set to 4 e Parameter Name amp Description Parameter name as it appears on an LCD HIM with a brief description of the parameters function SIEMCEMCM This parameter is specific to the Standard Control Option This parameter will only be available with the Vector Control option Only available with Vector Control option firmware version 3 xxx amp later Values Defines the various operating characteristics of the parameter Three types exist ENUM Default Options Lists the value assigned at the factory Read Only no default Displays the programming selections available Bit Bit Lists the bit place holder and definition for each bit Numeric Default Min Max Units Lists the value assigned at the factory Read Only no default The range lowest and highest setting possible for the parameter Unit of measure and resolution as shown on the LCD H
31. Lo 100 Jog Speed 346 Analog Out2 Hi 101 Preset Speed 1 347 Analog Out2 Lo 102 Preset Speed 2 381 Dig Out Level 103 Preset Speed 3 382 Dig Out OnTime 104 Preset Speed 4 383 Dig Out OffTime 105 Preset Speed 5 385 Dig Out2 Level 106 Preset Speed 6 386 Dig Out2 OnTime 107 Preset Speed 7 387 Dig Out2 OffTime 119 Trim Hi 389 Dig Out3 Leve 120 Trim Lo 390 Dig Out3 OnTime 121 Slip RPM FLA 391 Dig Out3 OffTime 122 Slip Comp Gain 416 Fdbk Filter Sel 123 Slip RPM Meter 419 Notch Filter Freq 127 PI Setpoint 420 Notch Filter K 129 PI Integral Time 428 Torque Ref A Hi 130 PI Prop Gain 429 Torque Ref A Lo 131 PI Lower Limit 430 Torq Ref A Div 132 PI Upper Limit 432 Torque Ref B Hi 133 PI Preload 433 Torque Ref B Lo 140 Accel Time 1 434 Torq Ref B Mult 141 Accel Time 2 435 Torque Setpoint 142 Decel Time 1 436 Pos Torque Limit 143 Decel Time 2 437 Neg Torque Limit 146 S Curve 445 Ki Speed Loop 148 Current Lmt Val 446 Kp Speed Loop 149 Current Lmt Gain 447 Kf Speed Loop 151 PWM Frequency 449 Speed Desired BW 152 Droop RPM FLA 450 Total Inertia 153 Regen Power Limit 454 Rev Speed Limit 154 Current Rate Limit 460 PI Reference Hi 158 DC Brake Level 461 PI Reference Lo B 8 HIM Overview Removing Installing the HIM The HIM can be removed or installed while the drive is powered Important HIM removal is only permissible in Auto mode If the HIM is removed while in Manual mode or the HIM is the only remaining
32. Max 9 Available Catalog Numbers 140 7 20BB2P2 0 0 5 0 33 4 50 1 9 07 125 2 8 3 8 3 6 3 10 15 3 M C2E B25 M D8E B25 20BB4P2 0 1 0 75 4 50 37 13 48 5 6 7 0 6 10 6 17 5 15 7 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 S 20BB6P8 1 2 15 4 50 6 8 24 78 104 113 8 10 15 10 30 30 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BB9P6 1 3 2 4 50 9 5 34 11 12 1 17 12 20 12 40 40 15 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BB015 1 5 3 4 50 1S7 ee J175 193 123 20 35 20 70 70 30 M C2E C20 M D8E C20 M F8E C20 20BB022 1 7 5 5 4 50 23 0 8 3 25 3 27 8 38 30 50 30 100 100 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BB028 2 10 7 5 4 50 29 6 10 7 322 38 50 6 40 70 40 125 125 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 20BB042 3 15 10 4 50 445 16 0 48 3 53 1 725 60 100 60 175 175 70 M F8E C45 CMN 6300 20BB052 3 20 15 4 50 515 17 1 56 64 86 80 125 80 200 200 100 CMN 6300 20BB070 4 25 20 4 50 72 25 9 78 2 93 124 90 175 90 300 300 100 CMN 9000 20BB080 4 30 25 4 50 847 30 5 92 117 156 110 200 110 350 350 150 CMN 9000 20BB104 5 40 4 50 113 40 7 120 132 175 150 250 150 475 350 150 30 4 50 847 30 5 92 138 175 125 200 125 350 300 150 CMN 9000 20BB130 5 50 4 50 122 44 1 130 143 175 175 275 175 500 375 250 40 4 50 98 35 3 104 156 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 20BB154 6 60 4 50 167 60 1 177 195 266 225 350 225 500 500 250 e 50 4 50 141 50 9 15
33. Motor NP Hertz 043 Rated Amps 028 Control SW Ver 029 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor NP Power 045 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Motor OL Hertz 047 Motor OL Factor 048 Torq Attributes Torque Perf Mode 053 Maximum Voltage 054 Maximum Freq 055 Compensation 056 Flux Up Mode 057 Flux Up Time 058 SV Boost Filter 059 Autotune 061 IR Voltage Drop Flux Current Ref IXo Voltage Drop 062 063 064 Volts per Hertz Spd Mode amp Limits Start Acc Boost 069 Run Boost 070 Speed Mode 080 Minimum Speed 081 Maximum Speed 082 Break Voltage 071 Break Frequency 072 Overspeed Limit 083 Skip Frequency 1 084 Skip Frequency 2 085 Skip Frequency 3 Skip Freq Band 086 087 Speed References Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed Dei A H 091 Speed Dei A Lo 092 Speed Ref B Gel 093 Speed RefBHi 094 Speed RefBLo 095 TB Man Ref Sel TB Man Ref Hi TB Man Ref Lo 096 097 098 Discrete Speeds Jog Speed 100 Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Speed Trim Trim In Select 117 Trim Out Select 118 Trim Hi 119 Trim Lo 120 Slip Comp Slip RPM FLA 121 Slip Comp Gain 122 Slip RPM Meter 123 Process Pl Ramp Rates PI Configuration 124 PI Control 125 Pl Reference Sel 126 PI Setpoint 127 Pl Feedback Sel 128 Accel Time 1 140 Accel Time 2 141 Pl Integral Time 129 PI Prop Gain 130 Pl Lower Limit 131 PI Upper Limit 132 PI Preload 133 Decel Time 1 142 Decel Time 2 143 PI Status PI Ref Mete
34. Reference e View Results 10k Ohm Pot Parameter 002 Recommended 2k Ohm Minimum Joystick Bipolar o e Set Direction Mode Speed Reference Parameter 190 1 Bipolar 10V Input e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View Results Parameter 002 Analog Input e e Set Direction Mode Bipolar Speed OT Parameter 190 1 Bipolar Reference Diet e Adjust Scaling 10V Input Common rea SL Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 N T CFTE e View Results Laine Parameter 002 Analog Voltage o e Configure Input with parameter 320 Input Unipolar Speed Reference 0 to 10V Input e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View results Parameter 002 Analog Current Input Unipolar Speed Reference Standard 4 20 mA Input e Configure Input for Current Parameter 320 Bit 1 1 Current e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View Results Parameter 002 Analog Current Input Unipolar Speed Reference 4 20 mA Input e Configure Input for Current Parameter 320 and add jumper at appropriate terminals e Adjust Scaling Parameters 91 92 and 325 326 e View results Parameter 002 Analog
35. Start Inhibits 214 Fault Amps 225 Testpoint 2 Sel 236 Last Stop Source 215 Fault Bus Volts 226 Testpoint 2 Data 237 Dig In Status 216 Status 1 Fault 227 Faults Fault Config 1 238 Fault Clear Mode 241 Fault 1 8 Code 243 257 Fault Clear 240 Power Up Marker 242 Fault 1 8 Time 244 258 Alarms Alarm Configi 259 Alarm1 8 Code 262 269 Alarm Clear 261 Communication Comm Control DPI Baud Rate 270 Drive Ref Rslt 272 Drive Logic Rslt 271 Drive Ramp Rsit 273 Masks amp Logic Mask 276 Fault Clr Mask 283 Reference Owner 292 Owners Start Mask 277 MOP Mask 284 Accel Owner 293 Jog Mask 278 Local Mask 285 Decel Owner 294 Direction Mask 279 Stop Owner 288 Fault Clr Owner 295 Reference Mask 280 Start Owner 289 MOP Owner 296 Accel Mask 281 Jog Owner 290 Local Owner 297 Decel Mask 282 Direction Owner 291 Datalinks Data In A1 D2 300 307 Data Out A1 D2 310 317 Inputs amp Analog Inputs Ang In Config 320 Analog In 2 Hi 325 Anlg In 1 Loss 324 Outputs Anlg In Sqr Root 321 AnalogIniLo 323 Anlg In2Loss 327 Analog In 1 Hi 322 Analog In2Lo 326 Analog Outputs Anlg Out Config 340 Analog Out Hi 343 Anlg Out Absolut 341 Analog Out Lo 344 Analog Out Sel 342 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out Sel 380 Dig Out2 Level 385 Dig Out OffTime 383 Digital Out2 Sel 384 Dig Out OnTime 382 Dig Out2 OffTime 387 Dig Outi Level 381 Dig Out2 OnTime 386 3 8 Programming and Parameters Advanced
36. o o 10 Ref A Auto 0 0 0 Porto TB 0 0 O 1 Ref B Auto 0 0 1 Port1 0 O 1 0 Preset2 Auto 0 1 0 Port2 0 0 1 1 Preset3 Auto 0 1 1 Port3 0 1 0 0 Preset4 Auto 1 0 0 Port4 0 1 O 1 Preset5 Auto 1 0 1 Port5 0 1 1 10 Preset 6 Auto 1 1 10 Port6 O 1 1 1 Preset7 Auto 1 1 1 No Local 1 0 0 0 TB Manual Control 1 0 0 1 Port 1 Manual 3 1 O 1 O Port2 Manual Uu 1 JO 1 1 Port3 Manual z 1 1 0 0 Port 4 Manual En 1 1 0 1 Port B Manual 5 1 1 1 0 Port6 Manual 1 11 1 1 Jog Ref 210 Drive Status 2 Read Only 209 Present operating condition of the drive y S SVP SASA Ly SOLS ISS I A SSE OS ESSESES SS AUS C RS QU SQ Gy Sa aS IU U 1614 E SCH l 3 J 5 3 Ger i E False m x Reserved Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later 211 Drive Alarm 1 Read Only 212 Alarm conditions that currently exist in the drive Z Js KS o s VES SICCO I e P S ES M S d LE SA Y NIVEIS x o o o o o o o o x o o o o o o j Condtonme IR 14 13 12 11 10 9876543210 x Reserved Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later 3 42 File UTILITY Diagnostics Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 212 Drive Alarm 2 Read Only Alarm conditions that currently
37. 0 35 DTO Cmd Cur Lim 0 1 0 0 36 DTO Cmd DC Hold 1 0 32767 0 37 Control Bd Temp 0 1 0 0 60 0 0 0 1 Enter in Testpoint x Sel 0 Use the equation below to calculate total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Value of Code 9 Value of Code 10 x 01 Value of Code 5 Total Lifetime MegaWatt Hours Category Agency Certification Appendix A Supplemental Drive Information For information on See page Specifications A 1 Communication Configurations A 4 Output Devices A 7 Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings A 7 Dimensions A 15 Frame Cross Reference A 22 Specifications Specification Listed to UL508C and CAN CSA C2 2 No 14 M91 Wu Marked for all applicable European Directives 1 C WC Directive 89 336 EEC EN 61800 3 Adjustable Speed electrical power drive systems Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC EN 50178 Electronic Equipment for use in Power Installations N223 Certified to AS NZS 1997 Group 1 Class A The drive is also designed to meet the following specifications NFPA 70 US National Electrical Code NEMA ICS 3 1 Safety standards for Construction and Guide for Selection Installation and Operation of Adjustable Speed Drive Systems IEC 146 International Electrical Code 1 Applied noise impulses may be counted in addition to the standard pulse train causing erroneously high Pulse Freq readings Category Specification Protect
38. 0 1 Amps Read Only Drive Rating x 2 2 0 1 Amps Read Only 0 0 Drive Rated Volts 0 1 VAC Read Only 0 0 Drive Rated kW x 2 0 1 kW Read Only 0 00 1 00 0 01 Read Only 0 0 214748352 0 MWh 0 1 MWh Read Only 0 0 214748352 0 Hrs 0 1 Hrs Related Io Z Ico Group File No Metering 011 012 013 014 016 017 022 023 024 025 Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions MOP Frequency Value of the signal at MOP Motor Operated Potentiometer MOP Reference See description above DC Bus Voltage Present DC bus voltage level DC Bus Memory 6 minute average of DC bus voltage level Elapsed kWh Accumulated output energy of the drive Analog In1 Value Analog In2 Value Value of the signal at the analog inputs Ramped Speed Value of commanded speed after Accel Decel and S Curve are applied Speed Reference Summed value of ramped speed process Pl and droop When FVC Vector mode is selected droop will not be added Commanded Torque Final torque reference value after limits and filtering are applied Percent of motor rated torque Speed Feedback This parameter displays the value of actual motor speed whether measured by encoder feedback or estimated Programming and Parameters Values Default Read Only Min Max Maximum Freq Units 0 1 Hz Default Read Only
39. 0 Hz e frequency Skip Freq Band is split Units 0 1 Hz applying 1 2 above and 1 2 below the actual skip frequency The same bandwidth applies to all skip frequencies 088 Speed Torque Mod Default 1 Speed Reg 053 Selects the torque reference source Options 0 Zero Torque o E Zero Torque 0 torque command 0 1 Speed Reg AE i s c 2 Torque Reg E Speed Reg 1 drive operates as a 3 Min Toro Spd E speed regulator n K za o E s 4 Max Torq Spd z 3 Torque Reg 2 an external torque 5 Sum Torg Spd m reference is used for the torque 6 Absolute Min py 2 command Min Torq Spd 3 selects the smallest algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and torque generated from the speed regulator are compared Max Torq Spd 4 selects the largest algebraic value when the torque reference and the torque generated from the speed regulator are compared Sum Torq Spd 5 selects the sum of the torque reference and the torque generated from the speed regulator Absolute 6 selects the smallest absolute algebraic value to regulate to when the torque reference and torque generated from the speed regulator are compared 454 Rev Speed Limit Default 0 0 RPM Sets a limit on speed in the negative Min Max Max Speed 0 0 Hz direction when in FVC Vector mode Max Speed 0 0 RPM tr Used in bipolar mode only A value of Units 0 0 Hz zero disables this
40. 091 2 8 parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 75 0 24000 0 RPM perm ma Units 094 Ww c its 0 1 Hz 202 gt o 0 1 RPM pem SS 083 Overspeed Limit Default 10 0 Hz 055 O Sets the incremental amount of the SOUS e output frequency above Maximum Min Max 0 0 20 0 Hz rz Speed allowable for functions such as 0 0 600 0 RPM slip compensation Units 0 1Hz i Maximum Speed Overspeed Limit 0 1 RPM must be lt Maximum Freq A EC R Rp Ve Allowable Output Frequency Range LS Normal Operation l lt Allowable Reference Frequency Range gt Max Volts 4 T T Motor Volts dic das o l l S Frequency Trim due to Overspeed le I S Speed Control Mode Limit Break Volts 4 2 255 l Start Boost i l l l Run TENE 0 Min Break Motor Max Output Max Speed Frequency Hz Speed Freq Limit Freq Frequency Programming and Parameters 3 23 Parameter Name A Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Related File Group 084 Skip Frequency 1 Default 0 0 Hz 087 085 Skip Frequency 2 Default 0 0 Hz 086 Skip Frequency 3 Default 0 0 Hz i Sets a frequency at which the drive will Min Max Maximum Speed not operate Skip Frequency 1 3 and Units 0 1Hz Skip Frequency Band must not equal 0 087 Skip Freq Band Default 0 0 Hz 084 Determines the bandwidth around a skip Min Max 0 0 30
41. 1 6 7 9 2 9 12 9 20 20 15 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BE9PO 0 7 5 5 4 50 7 8 81 9 9 9 13 5 10 20 10 35 30 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BE011 1 10 75 4 50 9 9 10 2 11 18 5 18 15 25 15 40 40 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BE017 1 15 10 4 50 154 16 0 17 18 7 1 255 20 40 20 60 50 20 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BE022 2 20 15 4 50 202 21 0 22 255 34 30 50 30 80 80 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BE027 2 25 20 4 50 248 25 7 27 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 T M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BE032 3 30 25 4 50 29 4 30 5 32 405 54 40 70 40 125 125 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 20BE041 3 40 30 4 50 37 6 39 1 41 48 64 50 90 50 150 150 100 M F8E C45 CMN 4000 20BE052 3 50 40 4 50 47 7 49 6 52 615 82 60 110 60 200 200 100 CMN 6300 20BE062 4 60 50 2 50 58 2 60 5 62 78 104 80 125 80 225 225 100 CMN 6300 20BE077 5 75 2 50 723 751 77 85 116 90 150 90 300 300 100 CMN 9000 60 2 50 58 2 60 5 63 94 126 90 125 90 250 250 100 CMN 6300 20BE099 5 100 2 40 92 9 96 6 99 109 126 125 200 125 375 375 150 E 75 2 40 72 3 754 77 116 138 100 175 100 300 300 100 z CMN 9000 20BE125 6 125 2 50 117 122 125 138 188 150 250 150 375 375 250 100 2 50 93 96 6 99 149 198 125 200 125 375 375 150 20BE144 6 150 2 50 135 141 144 158 216 175 300 175 400 400 250 125 2 50 117 122 125 188 250 150
42. 10V 10V Maximum i Speed Minimum 1 i Speed 0 Reverse v Forward Speed Fa Speed Minimum Maximum Speed 0 Speed t 10V Figure C 7 Rev Speed Limit parameter 454 set to a non zero Value 10V Reverse Speed Limit Reverse Forward Speed i Speed Maximum Speed 10V Application Notes C 17 Skip Frequency Figure C 8 Skip Frequency Command F Frequency Frequency Drive Output H AFfequency A Skip 1 2 Band LL X 44 Skip Frequency gt Time Some machinery may have a resonant operating frequency that must be avoided to minimize the risk of equipment damage To assure that the motor cannot continuously operate at one or more of the points skip frequencies are used Parameters 084 086 Skip Frequency 1 3 are available to set the frequencies to be avoided The value programmed into the skip frequency parameters sets the center point for an entire skip band of frequencies The width of the band range of frequency around the center point is determined by parameter 87 Skip Freq Band The range is split half above and half below the skip frequency parameter If the commanded frequency of the drive is greater than or equal to the skip center frequency and less than or equal to the high value of the band skip plus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the high value of the band See A in Figure C 8 If the c
43. 3 26 Slip RPM Meter 3 26 Software Fault 4 8 Spd Mode amp Limits Group 3 21 SpdBand Integrat 3 60 Specifications Agency Certification A 1 Control A 2 A 3 Drive Ratings A 7 Index 11 Electrical A 2 Encoder A 3 Environment A 2 Protection A 1 A 2 Speed Command File 3 21 Speed Command Sources 1 22 Speed Desired BW 3 30 Speed Dev Band 3 60 Speed Feedback 3 13 Speed Feedback Group 3 20 Speed Loop Meter 3 30 Speed Mode 3 22 Speed Pot 1 20 Speed Ref A Hi 3 24 Speed Ref A Lo 3 24 Speed Ref A Sel 3 24 Speed Ref B Hi 3 24 Speed Ref B Lo 3 24 Speed Ref B Sel 3 24 Speed Ref Cflct Alarm 4 11 Speed Ref Source 3 42 Speed Reference 3 13 Speed Reference Control 1 22 Speed Reference Selection 1 22 Speed References Group 3 24 Speed Regulator Group 3 29 Speed Trim Group 3 26 Speed Units 3 21 Speed Torque Mod 3 23 Standard Control I O Terminal Block 1 17 Standard Control Option 3 3 Standard I O TB 1 16 Wiring 1 15 Start At PowerUp 3 34 C 21 Start At PowerUp Alarm 4 11 Start Inhibits 3 42 Start Mask 3 50 Start Owner 3 51 Start Acc Boost 3 19 Start Stop Repeated 1 12 Start Up Assisted 2 3 Checklist 2 1 Lifting Torque Proving 2 3 S M A R T 2 3 Static Discharge ESD P 3 Status 1 Fault 3 44 Status LEDs 4 2 Index 12 Stop Mode x 3 32 Stop Owner 3 51 Stop Brake Modes Group 3 32 Stop BRK Mode x 3 32 STS LED 4 2 Supply Source 1 2 SV Boost Filter 3 16 SW Ov
44. 3 37 Related mm per I Ic de LA IND IND Ico o l Ico ICO In 3 38 Programming and Parameters Group File No 18 Power Loss 18 18 18 19 Direction Config Group e 0 Selects method for changing direction Options 0 Unipolar 1 2 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Power Loss Level Sets the level at which the Power Loss Mode selection will occur Values Default Drive Rated Volts Min Max 0 0 999 9 VDC Units 0 1 VDC The drive can use the percentages referenced in Power Loss Mode or a trigger point can be set for line loss detection as follows Virigger DC Bus Memory Power Loss Level A digital input programmed to 29 Pwr Loss Lvl is used to toggle between fixed percentages and the detection level D If the value for Power Loss Level is greater than 18 of DC Bus Memory the user must provide a minimum line impedance to limit inrush current when the power line recovers The input impedance should be equal to or greater than the equivalent of a 5 transformer with a VA rating 5 times the drives input VA rating 7 Load Loss Level Default 200 0 Sets the percentage of motor nameplate Min Max 0 0 800 0 torque at which a load loss alarm will Units 0 1 occur Load Loss Time Default 0 0 Secs Sets the time that current is below the Min Max
45. 3 37 Waking Alarm 4 12 Web Sites see WWW World Wide Web Wire Control 1 16 Signal 1 15 Wiring 1 1 Access Panel Removal 1 7 Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 7 Encoder 1 19 Hardware Enable 1 19 1 0 1 15 Potentiometer 1 20 Power 1 5 WWW World Wide Web 1 1 P 1 P 2 Back 2 Z Zero SpdFloatTime 3 60 PowerFlex 700 Parameter Record Number Parameter Name Setting Number Parameter Name Setting 40 Motor Type 125 PI Contro 41 Motor NP Volts 126 Pl Reference Sel 42 Motor NP FLA 127 PI Setpoint 43 Motor NP Hertz 128 PI Feedback Sel 44 Motor NP RPM 129 PI Integral Time 45 Motor NP Power 130 PI Prop Gain 46 Mtr NP Pwr Units 181 PI Lower Limit 47 Motor OL Hertz 132 PI Upper Limit 48 Motor OL Factor 133 PI Preload 49 Motor Poles 139 PI BW Filter 53 Motor Cntl Sel 140 141 Accel Time X Torque Perf Mode 142 143 Decel Time X 54 Maximum Voltage 145 DB While Stopped 55 Maximum Freq 146 S Curve 56 Compensation 147 Current Lmt Sel 57 Flux Up Mode 148 Current Lmt Val 58 Flux Up Time 149 Current Lmt Gain 59 SV Boost Filter 150 Drive OL Mode 61 Autotune 151 PWM Frequency 62 IR Voltage Drop 152 Droop RPM FLA 63 Flux Current Ref 153 Regen Power Limit 64 Ixo Voltage Drop 154 Current Rate Limit 66 Autotune Torque 155 156 Stop Mode X 67 Inertia Auto
46. 52 Diagnostics 3 41 Digital Inputs 3 57 Digital Outputs 3 57 Direction Config 3 38 Discrete Speeds 3 25 Drive Data 3 14 Drive Memory 3 39 Faults 3 46 HIM Ref Config 3 39 Load Limits 3 31 Masks 8 Owners 3 50 Metering 3 12 MOP Config 3 39 Motor Data 3 14 Power Loss 3 37 Process Pl 3 27 Ramp Rates 3 31 Restart Modes 3 34 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Slip Comp 3 26 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 21 Speed Feedback 3 20 Speed References 3 24 Speed Regulator 3 29 Speed Trim 3 26 Stop Brake Modes 3 32 Torq Attributes 3 15 Volts per Hertz 3 19 Index 5 H Hardware Enable 1 19 Hardware Fault 4 5 Heatsink OvrTemp Fault 4 5 HIM Menu Structure B 4 HIM Menus Diagnostics B 4 Memory Storage B 4 Preferences B 4 HIM Ref Config Group 3 39 HIM Removing Installing B 8 HW OverCurrent Fault 4 6 1 0 Cassette 1 16 Standard 1 15 Terminal Block 1 16 UO Comm Loss Fault 4 6 UO Failure Fault 4 6 UO Mismatch Fault 4 6 In Phase Loss Alarm 4 11 Incompat MCB PB Fault 4 6 Inertia Autotune 3 18 Input Contactor Start Stop 1 12 Input Devices Circuit Breakers 1 5 Contactors 1 12 Fuses 1 5 Input Fusing 1 5 Input Phase Loss Fault 4 6 Input Potentiometer 1 20 Input Power Conditioning 1 3 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 53 Installation 1 1 IntDBRes OvrHeat Alarm 4 11 IR Voltage Drop 3 17 IR Volts Range Alarm 4 11 IR Volts Range Fault 4 6 Ixo Vit Rang Alarm 4 11 Ixo Voltage Drop 3 17 IXo VoltageRan
47. 7 400 Volt AC Input 20BC1P3 0 0 37 0 25 4 50 14 077 13 14 1 9 3 3 3 6 15 3 M C2E B16 20BC2P1 0 0 75 0 55 4 50 1 8 13 21 2 4 3 2 3 6 3 15 3 M C2E B25 M D8E B25 20BC3P5 0 1 5 0 75 4 50 3 2 22 35 45 6 0 6 7 6 12 15 7 M C2E B40 M D8E B40 20BC5PO 0 22 15 4 50 46 32 50 5 5 7 5 6 10 6 20 20 7 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BC8P7 0 4 22 4 50 79 55 87 99 132 15 175 15 30 30 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BC011 0 55 4 4 50 108 75 115 13 174 15 25 15 45 45 15 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BC015 147 5 55 4 50 144 10 0 154 172 231 20 30 20 60 60 20 M C2E C20 M D8E C20 M F8E C20 20BC022 1 11 75 4 50 20 6 14 3 22 24 2 33 30 45 30 80 80 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 20BC030 2 15 11 4 50 284 19 7 30 33 45 35 60 35 120 120 50 gt M F8E C32 20BC037 2 185 15 4 50 350 24 3 37 45 60 45 80 45 125 125 50 M F8E C45 20BC043 3 22 18 5 4 50 40 7 28 2 43 56 74 60 90 60 150 150 60 20BC056 3 30 22 4 50 53 36 7 56 64 86 70 125 70 200 200 100 z 20BC072 3 37 30 4 50 68 9 47 8 72 84 112 90 150 90 250 250 100 20BC085 4 45 4 45 814 56 4 85 94 128 110 200 110 300 300 150 37 4 45 68 9 47 8 72 108 144 90 175 90 275 300 100 n 20BC105 5 55 4 50 100 5 69 6 105 1
48. All 287 1 13 Dia 47 0 1 85 Dia lt 760 29 Places 2Plaoes 65 3 257 gt 54 1 2 18 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 2 Places A 189 7 7 47 179 7 00 187 9 6 21 141 9 559 1051 4 14 i 26 8 1 06 lt gt 36 8 1 45 Le 50 7 2 00 Le lt 63 8 2 51 gt 112 0 4 41 gt 180 0 7 09 Frame Supplemental Drive Information A 21 Rating Dimensions 75 HP 104 0 4 09 34 9 1 37 Dia o 2P 222 087 Dia 480V 93257 gt o laces 22 2 087 Dia 55KW 400V 62 7 247 Dia Normal 2 Places Duty Drive 241 9 2 52 2295 8 04 2200 8 66 1840 029 as 628 960 878 yoy 28 0 1 10 45 01 77 85 0 3 35 E 150 0 6 91 gt 215 0 8 46 255 0 10 04 100 HP 349 137 Dia 62 7 247 Dia 480V 426 1 68 2 F i Epis 2 Places Normal 31 9 1 26 Removable Junction Box Duty Dive 4 S9 E e n A K AWN N e G T t T 2419 A o L N p 9 52 S lo 1 EE 8 80 T 1885 NE El T 7 42 3 5 184 3 028 es 6 04 960
49. B Sel Default 11 Preset Spd1 See O See Speed Ref A Sel Options See Speed Ref A 090 Sel 094 Speed Ref B Hi Default Maximum Speed 079 Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref Min Max Maximum Speed 093 B Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 Hz analog input 0 01 RPM 095 Speed Ref B Lo Default 0 0 079 Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref Min Max Maximum Speed ie B Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1Hz EE analog input 0 01 RPM a lt eo D TT DI a N Speed Reference No 096 097 098 099 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions TB Man Ref Sel Sets the manual speed reference source when a digital input is configured for Auto Manual 1 Analog In 2 is not a valid selection if it was selected for any of the following Trim In Select PI Feedback Sel PI Reference Sel Current Lmt Sel Sleep Wake Ref TB Man Ref Hi Scales the upper value of the TB Man Ref Sel selection when the source is an analog input TB Man Ref Lo Scales the lower value of the TB Man Ref Sel selection when the source is an analog input Pulse Input Ref Displays the pulse input value as seen at terminals 5 and 6 of the Encoder Terminal Block if Encoder Z Chan parameter 423 is set to Pulse Input Jog Speed Sets the ou
50. BW 449 Speed Regulator 3 30 SpdBand Integrat 603 Torg Proving 3 60 Spd Dev Band 602 Torq Proving 3 60 Speed Feedback 25 Metering 3 13 Speed Loop Meter 451 Speed Regulator 3 30 Speed Mode 80 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 Speed Ref Source 213 Diagnostics 3 42 Speed Ref X Hi 91 94 Speed Reference 3 24 Speed Ref X Lo 92 95 Speed Reference 3 24 Speed Ref X Sel 90 93 Speed Reference 3 24 Speed Reference 23 Metering 3 13 Speed Units 79 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 21 Speed Torque Mod 88 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 23 Start At PowerUp 168 Restart Modes 3 34 Start Inhibits 214 Diagnostics 3 42 Start Mask 277 Masks amp Owners 3 50 Start Owner 289 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Start Acc Boost 69 Volts per Hertz 3 19 Status X Fault 227 228 Diagnostics 3 44 Stop Mode X 155 156 Stop Brake Modes 3 32 Stop Owner 288 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Stop BRK Mode X 155 156 Stop Brake Modes 3 32 SV Boost Filter 59 Torq Attributes 3 16 TB Man Ref Hi 97 Speed Reference 3 25 TB Man Ref Lo 98 Speed Reference 3 25 TB Man Ref Sel 96 Speed Reference 3 25 Testpoint X Data 235 237 Diagnostics 3 45 Testpoint X Sel 234 236 Diagnostics 3 45 TorqLim SlewRate 608 Torq Proving 3 60 TorqProve Cnfg 600 Torq Proving 3 59 TorqProve Setup 601 Torq Proving 3 59 Torq Ref A Div 430 Torq Attributes 3 18 Torque Current 4 Metering 3 12 Torque Perf Mode 53 Torq Attributes 3 15 Torque Ref B Mult 434 Torq Attr
51. Config Sleep Wake configuration error With Sleep Wake Mode Direct possible causes include drive is stopped and Wake Level lt Sleep Level Stop CF Run Run Forward or Run Reverse is not configured in Digital Inx Sel Speed Ref x Sel or PI Reference Sel is set to Reserved Start At PowerUp is enabled Drive may start at any time within 10 seconds of drive powerup 4 12 Troubleshooting Alarm TB Man Ref 30 Cflct TorqProve 49 Cflct Waking Q UnderVoltage 2 VHz Neg Slope 24 No Type 110 Description Occurs when e Auto Manual is selected default for Digital In3 Sel parameter 363 and e TB Man Ref Sel parameter 96 has been reprogrammed No other use for the selected analog input may be programmed Example If TB Man Ref Sel is reprogrammed to Analog In 2 all of the factory default uses for Analog In 2 must be reprogramed such as parameters 90 117 128 and 179 See also Auto Manual Examples on page 1 23 To correct e Verify reprogram the parameters that reference an analog input or e Reprogram Digital In3 to another function or Unused When TorqProve Cnfg is enabled Motor Cntl Sel Feedback Select and Motor Fdbk Type must be properly set refer to page C 4 The bus voltage has dropped below a predetermined value Torq Perf Mode Custom V Hz amp the V Hz slop
52. Curve 3 31 Save HIM Ref 3 39 Save MOP Ref 3 39 Save To User Set 3 40 Scale In Hi 3 48 Scale In Lo 3 48 Scale In Value 3 48 Scale Out Hi 3 48 Scale Out Lo 3 48 Scale Out Value 3 48 Shear Pin Time 3 38 U 0 00909090 09 0 CDU UU TUU U Index 9 Skip Freq Band 3 23 Skip Frequency x 3 23 Sleep Level 3 37 Sleep Time 3 37 Sleep Wake Mode 3 36 Sleep Wake Ref 3 37 Slip Comp Gain 3 26 Slip RPM FLA 3 26 Slip RPM Meter 3 26 SpdBand Integrat 3 60 Speed Desired BW 3 30 Speed Dev Band 3 60 Speed Feedback 3 13 Speed Loop Meter 3 30 Speed Mode 3 22 Speed Ref A Hi 3 24 Speed Ref A Lo 3 24 Speed Ref A Sel 3 24 Speed Ref B Hi 3 24 Speed Ref B Lo 3 24 Speed Ref B Sel 3 24 Speed Ref Source 3 42 Speed Reference 3 13 Speed Units 3 21 Speed Torque Mod 3 23 Start At PowerUp 3 34 Start Inhibits 3 42 Start Mask 3 50 Start Owner 3 51 Start Acc Boost 3 19 Status 1 Fault 3 44 Stop Mode x 3 32 Stop Owner 3 51 Stop BRK Mode x 3 32 SV Boost Filter 3 16 TB Man Ref Hi 3 25 TB Man Ref Lo 3 25 TB Man Ref Sel 3 25 Testpoint 1 Sel 3 45 Testpoint x Data 3 45 Torq Ref A Div 3 18 TorqLim SlewRate 3 60 TorqProve Cnfg 3 59 TorgProve Setup 3 59 Torque Current 3 12 Torque Perf Mode 3 15 Torque Ref B Mult 3 2 3 18 Torque Ref x Hi 3 18 Torque Ref x Lo 3 18 Torque Ref x Sel 3 18 Torque Setpoint 3 19 Torque Setpoint2 3 19 Total Inertia 3 30 Trim Setpoint 3 26 In
53. Custom V Hz modes are selected See parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 3 19 Related I gt o1 Io o SA de I gt o1 Io o iu de o lon de I gt SA IG o Z Ic Io ion 29 io o io 3 20 Programming and Parameters MOTOR CONTROL Speed Feedback 1072 412 413 414 415 416 419 Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Break Voltage Sets the voltage the drive will output at Break Frequency Refer to parameter 083 Overspeed Limit Break Frequency Sets the frequency the drive will output at Break Voltage Refer to parameter 083 Motor Fdbk Type Selects the encoder type single channel or quadrature Options 1 amp 3 detect a loss of encoder signal when using differential inputs regardless of the Feedback Select param 080 setting For FVC Vector mode use a quadrature encoder only option 0 1 If a single channel encoder is used option 2 3 in sensorless vector or V Hz mode select Reverse Dis option 2 in param 190 Encoder PPR Contains the encoder pulses per revolution For improved operation in FVC Vector mode PPR should be gt 64 x motor poles Enc Position Fdbk Displays raw encoder pulse count For single channel encoders this count will increase per rev by the amount in Encoder PPR For quadrature encoders this count will increase by 4 times the
54. Input PTC PTC OT set gt 5V PTC OT cleared lt 4V PTC Short lt 0 2V 9 gt O Bead Ohm e Set Drive Alarm 1 Parameter 211 bit 11 True e Set Fault Config 1 Parameter 238 bit 7 Enabled e Set Alarm Config 1 Parameter 259 bit 11 Enabled 1 Refer to the Attention statement on page 1 15 for important bipolar wiring information Input Output Analog Output 10V 4 20 mA Bipolar 10V Unipolar shown Standard Control 4 20 mA Unipolar A use term 8 amp 9 1 0 Wiring Examples continued Connection Example O ja JC IC Installation Wiring 1 21 Required Parameter Changes Configure with Parameter 340 Select Source Value Parameter 384 Digital Out Sel Adjust Scaling Parameters 343 344 2 Wire Control Non Reversing 24V DC internal supply Disable Digital Input 1 Parameter 361 0 Unused Set Digital Input 2 Parameter 362 7 Run Set Direction Mode Parameter 190 0 Unipolar 2 Wire Control Neutra 115V Reversing Common 24V Set Digital Input 1 Parameter 361 8 Run Forward
55. Input Phase Loss 17 IR Volts Range 77 IXo VoltageRange 87 Load Loss 15 Motor Overload 7 Motor Thermistor 16 NVS I O 109 Checksum NVS I O Failure 110 Description The drive output current has exceeded the hardware current limit Drive rating information stored on the power board is incompatible with the main control board 1 0 Board lost communications with the Main Control Board UO was detected but failed the powerup sequence 1 0 Board is separate in Standard amp integral in Vector Control 1 0 board configuration not the same from last time drive was powered up The DC bus ripple has exceeded a preset level Calculate is the autotune default and the value determined by the autotune procedure for IR Drop Volts is not in the range of acceptable values Voltage calculated for motor inductive impedance exceeds 25 of Motor NP Volts Drive output torque current is below Load Loss Level for a time period greater than Load Loss time Internal electronic overload trip Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 46 Thermistor output is out of range EEprom checksum error EEprom UO error Action Check programming Check for excess load improper DC boost setting DC brake volts set too high or other causes of excess current Load compatible version files into drive Check connector Check for induced noise Replace UO board or Main Control Board
56. allows for slower operation of a lift which provides an operator with better resolution when positioning a load Micro Position is activated only when the drive is running at or near zero speed This can be initiated by a digital input configured as Micro Pos or through a communication device TorqProve Setup which is the same digital input which signals the float condition Fast Stop Fast Stop is intended to stop the load as fast as possible then set the mechanical brake The Fast Stop can be initiated from a digital input or through a communication device through TorqProve Setup The difference from a normal stop is that the decel time is forced to be 0 1 seconds When the Torque Proving function is enabled the Float time is ignored at the end of the ramp This feature can be used without enabling the Torque Proving function Minimum Speed Refer to Reverse Speed Limit on page C 16 Application Notes Motor Control Technology Within the PowerFlex family there are several motor control technologies e Torque Producers e Torque Controllers e Speed Regulators Torque Producers Volts Hertz This technology follows a specific pattern of voltage and frequency output to the motor regardless of the motor being used The shape of the V Hz curve can be controlled a limited amount but once the shape is determined the drive output is fixed to those values Given the fixed values each motor will react based on its own speed
57. and Functions on page 4 16 for a listing of available codes and functions Testpoint 1 Data Testpoint 2 Data The present value of the function selected in Testpoint x Sel Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Vector firmware 3 001 amp later 499 0 65535 1 Read Only 0 4294967295 2147483648 1 3 46 File UTILITY Programming and Parameters 23 CO 240 24 242 243 245 247 249 251 253 255 257 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Fault Config 1 Enables disables annunciation of the listed faults Values IN I e XY 8 Ad qq D PES IS QUO AS SUN LSS x xIx o o x o o o 1 o o 1 x 1 o f Enaed rise 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 RR Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later Factory Default Bit Values Fault Clear Default 0 Ready Resets a fault and clears the fault queue Options 0 Ready 1 Clear Faults 2 Cir Fit Que Fault Clear Mode Default 1 Enabled Enables disables a fault reset clear Options 0 Disabled faults attempt from any source This 1 Enabled does not apply to fault codes which are cleared indirectly via other actions Power Up Marker Default Read Only Elapsed hours since initial drive power Min Max 0 0000 429496 7295 Hr up This value will rollover to 0 after the 0 0 429496 7 Hr drive h
58. checksum calculated ption of fault types Table 4 B Fault Cross Reference Troubleshooting Action 4 9 Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or power interruption Re save user set No Fault No Fault No Fault 2 Auxiliary Input 39 Phase V to Grnd 87 IXo VoltageRange 3 Power Loss 40 Phase W to Grnd 88 Software Fault 4 UnderVoltage 41 Phase UV Short 89 Software Fault 5 OverVoltage 42 Phase VW Short 90 Encoder Quad Err 7 Motor Overload 43 Phase UW Short 91 Encoder Loss 8 Heatsink OvrTemp 48 Params Defaulted 92 Pulse In Loss 9 Trnsistr OvrTemp 49 Drive Powerup 93 Hardware Fault 12 HW OverCurrent 51 Fit QueueCleared 100 Parameter Chksum 13 Ground Fault 52 Faults Cleared 101 103 UserSet Chksum 15 Load Loss 55 Cnt Bd Overtemp 104 Pwr Brd Chksum1 16 Motor Thermistor 63 Shear Pin 105 Pwr Brd Chksum2 17 Input Phase Loss 64 Drive OverLoad 106 Incompat MCB PB 20 TorgPrv Spd Band 69 DB Resistance 107 Replaced MCB PB 21 Output PhaseLoss 70 Power Unit 108 Anlg Cal Chksum 24 Decel Inhibit 71 75 Port 1 5 Adapter 120 UO Mismatch 25 OverSpeed Limit 77 IR Volts Range 121 UO Comm Loss 29 Analog In Loss 78 FluxAmpsRef Rang 122 1 0 Failure 33 Auto Rstrt Tries 79 Excessive Load 130 Hardware Fault 36 SW OverCurrent 80 AutoTune Aborted 131 Hardware Fault 38 Phase U to Grnd 81 85 Port 1 5 DPI Loss 1 Clearing Alarms Alarms are automatically clea
59. considered unacceptable by the user 7 Setthe following parameters as shown No 053 Name Value Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector Notes 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 061 Autotune 2 Rotate Tune 8 Start the drive and run the motor in the desired direction Parameters 062 063 064 amp 121 will be updated Inertia AutoTune Test 9 Set Inertia Autotune parameter 067 to 1 Inertia Tune 10 Press Start and run the motor in the direction desired Parameters 445 446 and 450 will be updated 11 Set Speed Desired BW parameter 449 to desired setting 12 Set up is complete check for proper operation Drive Setup TorqProve Cnfg parameter 600 must be set to Enabled Once this is set a Type 2 alarm will be active until the following three parameter settings are entered Name Value Nais No 053 Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 412 Motor Fdbk Type 1 Quad Check Application Notes C 5 Installation Wiring When TorqProve Cnfg is set to Enable the Digital Out 1 relay is used to control the external brake contactor The normally open N O contact when closed is intended to energize the contactor This provides the mechanical brake with voltage causing the brake to release Any interruption of power to the contactor will set the mechanical brake Programmin
60. control device a fault will occur Step LOTO Example Displays To remove the HIM 1 Press ALT and then Enter Remove The Q9 Remove Op Intrfc Remove HIM confirmation screen appears Press Enter to Disconnect Op Intric 2 Press Enter to confirm that you want to Port 1 Control remove the HIM 3 Remove the HIM from the drive To install HIM 1 Insert into drive or connect cable Appendix C Application Notes For information on See page For information on Seepage External Brake Resistor C 1 Process Pl for Standard C 13 Control Lifting Torque Proving C 2 Reverse Speed Limit C 16 Minimum Speed C 7 Skip Frequency C 17 Motor Control Technology C 8 Sleep Wake Mode C 19 Motor Overload C 10 Start At PowerUp C 21 Overspeed C 11 Stop Mode C 22 Power Loss Ride Through C 12 Voltage Tolerance C 24 External Brake Resistor Figure C 1 External Brake Resistor Circuitry Three Phase AC Input Allen Bradley Input Contactor M Power Off Power On olo 558 ER Ke Power Source DB Resistor Thermostat C 2 Application Notes Lifting Torque Proving The lifting torque proving feature of the PowerFlex 700 is intended for applications where proper coordination between motor control and a mechanical brake is required Prior to releasing a mechanical brake the drive will check motor output phase continuity
61. e Alarm name Type 2 alarms only e Alarm bell graphic Hz Main Menu Diagnostics Parameter Device Select 4 4 Troubleshooting Manually Clearing Faults Step 1 Press Esc to acknowledge the fault The fault information will be removed so that you can use the HIM 2 Address the condition that caused the fault The cause must be corrected before the fault can be cleared 3 After corrective action has been taken clear the fault by one of these methods e Press Stop e Cycle drive power e Set parameter 240 Fault Clear to 1 e Clear Faults on the HIM Diagnostic menu Fault Descriptions Table 4 A Fault Types Descriptions and Actions Fault Analog In Loss Anlg Cal Chksum Auto Rstrt Tries AutoTune Aborted Auxiliary Input Cntl Bd Overtemp DB Resistance S E 29 108 OQ Typelt Description An analog input is configured to fault on signal loss A signal loss has occurred Configure with Anlg In 1 2 Loss on page 3 54 The checksum read from the analog calibration data does not match the checksum calculated Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of FIt RstRun Tries Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 46 Autotune function was canceled by the user or a fault occurred Auxiliary input interlock is open The temperature sensor on the Main Control Board detected
62. excessive heat Resistance of the internal DB resistor is out of range Key s Action 1 Check parameters 2 Check for broken loose connections at inputs Replace drive Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear Restart procedure Check remote wiring 1 Check Main Control Board fan 2 Check surrounding air temperature 3 Verify proper mounting cooling Replace resistor Fault Decel Inhibit Drive OverLoad Drive Powerup Excessive Load Encoder Loss Encoder Quad Err Faults Cleared Fit QueueCleared FluxAmpsRef Rang Ground Fault Hardware Fault Hardware Fault Hardware Fault Heatsink OvrTemp No Type 130 131 CO Description The drive is not following a commanded deceleration because it is attempting to limit bus voltage Drive rating of 110 for 1 minute or 150 for 3 seconds has been exceeded Troubleshooting 4 5 Action 1 Verify input voltage is within drive specified limits 2 Verify system ground impedance follows proper grounding techniques 3 Disable bus regulation and or add dynamic brake resistor and or extend deceleration time Refer to the Attention statement on page P 4 Reduce load or extend Accel Time No fault displayed Used as a Power Up Marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the drive power has been cycled Motor did not come up to speed in the allotted time during autotune Requires different
63. exist in the drive L n a e dS L Ky QOS SMS SAIS SIS SS SRY ESV S SO S SA Q IS EEN ojojojo ojojo o O O O O O O O O 7 MON TU pits 1413 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ao Bit cy AS aS 1 Condition True x x x x x x x x x X X X X X X O 0 Condition False PS 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x Beseryeg Bit Vector firmware 3 001 amp later 213 Speed Ref Source Default Read Only Displays the source of the speed Options 0 PI Output reference to the drive 1 Analog In 1 1 Vector firmware 3 001 and later 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Jog Speed 1 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 18 DPI Port 1 19 DPI Port 2 20 DPI Port 3 21 DPI Port 4 22 DPI Port 5 23 Reserved 24 Auto Tune Imma 25 Jog Speed 2 rem 26 Scale Block 1 27 Scale Block 2 1 28 Scale Block 3 1 29 Scale Block 4 214 Start Inhibits Read Only Displays the inputs currently preventing the drive from starting SAS S PASAS dS LS SISSI M I I E A SU IAE Innibit Iru EECHER 6 Sala 2 See pis E x Reserved Bit o O I I gt cO de I gt O IO kek Group File No Diagnostics 215 216 217 218 219 Programming and Parameters P
64. ga Output Amps Number iE ND HD Amps kW Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Bussmann Style Fuse 650 Volt DC Input 20BD1P1 0 05 0 33 1 0 0 6 1 1 1 2 1 6 6 BUSSMANN_JKS 6 20BD2P1 01 0 75 1 9 12 21 24 32 6 BUSSMANN JKS 6 20BD3P4 0 2 15 3 0 20 134 45 6 0 6 BUSSMANN_JKS 6 20BD5P0 013 2 45 29 50 5 5 75 10 BUSSMANN_JKS 10 20BD8P0 ols le rus 52 80 88 12 15 BUSSMANN JKS 15 20BD011 0175 5 114 72 11 121 165 20 BUSSMANN_JKS 20 20BD014 1 10 75 147 95 14 16 5 22 30 BUSSMANN_JKS 30 20BD022 1 15 10 23 3 15 1 22 242 33 45 BUSSMANN_JKS 45 20BD027 2 20 15 289 188 27 33 44 60 BUSSMANN_JKS 60 20BD034 2 25 20 364 23 6 34 405 54 70 BUSSMANN_JKS 70 20BD040 3 30 25 429 27 8 40 51 68 80 BUSSMANN_JKS 80 20BD052 340 30 55 7 36 1 52 60 80 100 BUSSMANN_JKS 100 20BD065 3 50 40 697 45 4 65 78 104 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 20BR077 UH 4 50 67 9 45 4 65 98 130 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 4 160 845 54 7 77 85 116 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 BS Refer to Table A for frame information Weights include HIM and Standard I O Supplemental Drive Information A 15 i kW DC Input a Rating Ratings Output Amps Number i ND HD Amps kW Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Fuse Bussmann Style Fuse 20BR096 1 5 60 845 54 7 77 116 154 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 T5 105 3 68 3 96 106 144 200
65. large variations in insulation concentricity 1 6 Location Standard Option 1 Installation Wiring Shielded Armored Cable Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given in installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales capacitive proximity switches and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location imposed EMC regulations or a high degree of communications networking are also good candidates for shielded cable Shielded cable may also help reduce shaft voltage and induced bearing currents for some applications In addition the increased impedance of shielded cable may help extend the distance that the motor can be located from the drive without the addition of motor protective devices such as terminator networks Refer to Reflected Wave in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INO01A EN P Consideration should be given to all of the general specifications dictated by the environment of the installation including temperature flexibility moisture characteristics and chemical resistance In addition a braided shield should be included and be specified by the cable manufactu
66. lt 85 0 33 A 18 0 0 71 EEN 360 6 14 20 gt Ee E 7 patai e Si AOT o o e e y o e 3 PowerFlex o B E o e e o Yd En P A A Ak d 126 3 8 5 0 33 o 4 Lifting Holes 37 135 0 53 12 7 0 50 Dia Approx Weight 2 kg Ibs 403 9 15 90 850 0 33 46 275 5 10 85 300 0 11 81 825 0 32 48 71 44 157 5 9 1 Refer to Table A for frame information 2 Weights include HIM and Standard 1 0 3 Add an additional 3 6 kg 8 00 Ibs for 200 HP drives Drive amp Packaging 91 85 202 5 3 S A 19 upplemental Drive Information Frame Figure A 7 PowerFlex 700 Bottom View Dimensions Rating All Dimensions lt 96 0 3 78 gt lt 75 0 2 95 35 0 1 38 22 2 0 87 Dia A Wu a 41 9 1 65 l lt 56 1 221 75 9 2 99 lt 96 0 3 78 gt 185 0 7 28 4 Places All lt 108 5 4 27 gt lt 87 5 3 44 lt 67 5 2 66 gt 47 5 1 87 AL 28 6 1 13 Dia 7 222 0 87 Dia 3 Places Y 255 1 00 133 3 525 Y 5 1 29 430 1 69
67. pulse in a configured package Carrier Frequency 2 4 8 amp 10 kHz Drive rating based on 4 kHz see pages A 8 through A 13 for exceptions Output Voltage Range 0 to rated motor voltage Output Frequency Range Standard Control 0 to 400 Hz Vector Control 0 to 420 Hz Frequency Accuracy Digital Input Within 0 01 of set output frequency Analog Input Within 0 4 of maximum output frequency Supplemental Drive Information A 3 Category Specification Control Frequency Control Speed Regulation w Slip Compensation continued Volts per Hertz Mode Standard 0 5 of base speed across 40 1 speed range 40 1 operating range 10 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Slip Compensation Sensorless Vector Mode IRE 0 5 of base speed across 80 1 speed range 80 1 operating range 20 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Feedback Sensorless Vector Mode 0 1 of base speed across 80 1 speed range 80 1 operating range 20 rad sec bandwidth Speed Control Speed Regulation w o Feedback Vector Control Mode 0 1 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 120 1 operating range 50 rad sec bandwidth Speed Regulation w Feedback Vector Control Mode 0 001 of base speed across 120 1 speed range 1000 1 operating range 250 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation Torque Regulation w o Feedback 10 600 rad sec bandwidth Torque Regulation w Feedback 5
68. recommended that the user install a minimum amount of impedance between the drive and the source This impedance could come from the supply transformer itself the cable between the transformer and drive or an additional transformer or reactor The impedance can be calculated using the information supplied in Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI Installation Wiring General Grounding Requirements The drive Safety Ground PE must be connected to system ground Ground impedance must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes The integrity of all ground connections should be periodically checked For installations within a cabinet a single safety ground point or ground bus bar connected directly to building steel should be used All circuits including the AC input ground conductor should be grounded independently and directly to this point bar Figure 1 1 Typical Grounding Safety Ground PE This is the safety ground for the drive that is required by code This point must be connected to adjacent building steel girder joist a floor ground rod or bus bar see above Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes Shield Termination SHLD The Shield terminal see Figure 1 3 on page 1 10 provides a grounding p
69. single process control loop The PI function reads a process variable input to the drive and compares it to a desired setpoint stored in the drive The algorithm will then adjust the output of the PI regulator changing drive output frequency to try and make the process variable equal the setpoint C 14 Application Notes It can operate as trim mode by summing the PI loop output with a master speed reference Slip Comp Slip Adder pen Linear Ramp Loop Spd Ref kl amp S Curve Spd Cmd Process PI DI Dei kescht A ee Process Pl F T Controller PIFbk gt PI Enabled Speed Control Or it can operate as control mode by supplying the entire speed reference This method is identified as exclusive mode Slip Comp Slip Adder gt Open j Loop Linear Ramp Spd Ref amp S Curve gt Spd Cmd Process D H Bei kal L Process Pl T Controller See PIFbk m gt PI Enabled Speed Control PI Enable The output of the PI loop can be turned on enabled or turned off disabled This control allows the user to determine when the PI loop is providing part or all of the commanded speed The logic for enabling the PI loop is shown below Drive Bit 0 of Drive Ramping Drive PI Control 1 The
70. to write default values to EEPROM A phase to ground fault has been detected between the drive and motor in this phase Excessive current has been detected between these two output terminals DPI port stopped communicating A SCANport device was connected to a drive operating DPI devices at 500k baud The communications card has a fault Troubleshooting 4 7 Action Check the drive and motor wiring Check for phase to phase continuity at the motor terminals Check for disconnected motor leads Remove excessive load or overhauling conditions or increase Overspeed Limit Monitor the AC line for high line voltage or transient conditions Bus overvoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration Extend the decel time or install dynamic brake option 1 Restore defaults 2 Reload User Set if used 1 Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive 2 Program the drive parameters as needed Check the wiring between the drive and motor 2 Check motor for grounded phase 3 Replace drive Check the motor and drive output terminal wiring for a shorted condition 2 Replace drive If adapter was not intentionally disconnected check wiring to the port Replace wiring port expander adapters Main Control Board or complete drive as required 2 Check HIM connection 3 If an adapter was intentionally disconnected and the Logic Mask bit for that adapter is set to 1 t
71. to be used only Type B adjustable devices should be used to avoid nuisance tripping Unbalanced or Ungrounded Distribution Systems If phase to ground voltage will exceed 125 of normal line to line voltage or the supply system is ungrounded refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES IN001 ATTENTION PowerFlex 700 drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground These devices should be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution system See page 1 13 for jumper locations Input Power Conditioning Certain events on the power system supplying a drive can cause component damage or shortened product life These conditions are divided into 2 basic categories 1 All drives The power system has power factor correction capacitors switched in and out of the system either by the user or by the power company The power source has intermittent voltage spikes in excess of 6000 volts These spikes could be caused by other equipment on the line or by events such as lightning strikes The power source has frequent interruptions 2 5 HP or Less Drives in addition to 1 above The nearest supply transformer is larger than 100k VA or the available short circuit fault current is greater than 100 000A The impedance in front of the drive is less than 0 5 If any or all of these conditions exist it is
72. to use of information circuits equipment or software described in this manual Reproduction of the contents of this manual in whole or in part without written permission of Rockwell Automation Inc is prohibited Throughout this manual when necessary we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment which may WARNING Identifies information about practices or circumstances A lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Important Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product ATTENTION Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death property damage or economic loss Attentions help you e identify a hazard e avoid the hazard e recognize the consequences Shock Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present Burn Hazard labels may be located on or inside the equipment e g drive or motor to alert people that surfaces may be at dangerous temperatures gt e D DriveExplorer DriveExecutive Force Technology and SCANport are trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc PowerFlex and PLC are registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation Inc ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International Ltd DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vend
73. torque characteristics This technology is good for basic centrifugal fan pump operation and for most multi motor applications Torque production is generally good Sensorless Vector This technology combines the basic Volts Hertz concept with known motor parameters such as Rated FLA HP Voltage stator resistance and flux producing current Knowledge of the individual motor attached to the drive allows the drive to adjust the output pattern to the motor and load conditions By identifying motor parameters the drive can maximize the torque produced in the motor and extend the speed range at which that torque can be produced This technology is excellent for applications that require a wider speed range and applications that need maximum possible torque for breakaway acceleration or overload Centrifuges extruders conveyors and others are candidates Torque Controllers Vector This technology differs from the two above because it actually controls or regulates torque Rather than allowing the motor and load to actually determine the amount of torque produced Vector technology allows the drive to regulate the torque to a defined value By independently identifying and controlling both flux and torque currents in the motor true control of torque is achieved High bandwidth current regulators remain active with or without encoder feedback to produce outstanding results Application Notes C 9 This technology is excellent for those
74. transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Important Used when motor is uncoupled from the load Results may not be valid if a load is coupled to the motor during this procedure ATTENTION Rotation of the motor in an undesired direction can occur during this procedure To guard against possible injury and or equipment damage it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the load before proceeding Calculate 3 This setting uses motor nameplate data to automatically set IR Voltage Drop Ixo Voltage Drop Flux Current Ref and Slip RPM FLA IR Voltage Drop Default Based on Drive Rating Value of voltage drop across the resis Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x0 25 tance of the motor stator at rated motor Units 0 1 VAC current Used only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector Flux Current Ref Default Based on Drive Rating Value of amps for full motor flux Used Min Max 0 00 Motor NP FLA only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Units 0 01 Amps Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector Ixo Voltage Drop Default Based on Drive Rating Value of voltage drop across the leakage Min Max 0 0 230 0 480 0 575 VAC inductance of the motor at rated motor Units 0 1 VAC current Used only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector 3 17 S Related io o IN o SA Co
75. when precharge board power supply is operational Alarm Yellow JO Oo E GMM Flashing Number in indicates flashes and associated alarm Low line voltage lt 90 Very low line voltage lt 50 Low phase one phase lt 80 of line voltage Frequency out of range or asymmetry line sync failed Low DC bus voltage triggers ride through operation Input frequency momentarily out of range 40 65 Hz DC bus short circuit detection active Fault 1 An alarm condition a Red Flashing 2 4 Number in 1 indicates flashes and associated fault DC bus short Udc lt 2 after 20 ms Line sync failed or low line Uac lt 50 Unom utomatically resets when the condition no longer exists 2 A fault indicates a malfunction that must be corrected and can only be reset after cycling power HIM Indication The LCD HIM also provides visual notification of a fault or alarm condition Condition Display Drive is indicating a fault The LCD HIM immediately reports the fault condition by displaying the following e Faulted appears in the status line Fault P e Fault number OverVoltage e Fault name e Time that has passed since fault occurred Press Esc to regain HIM control F gt Faultea auto Time Since Fault 0000 23 52 Drive is indicating an alarm The LCD HIM immediately reports the alarm condition by displaying the following
76. 0 225 300 200 300 200 500 450 250 20BB192 6 75 4 50 208 75 0 221 243 308 300 450 300 600 600 400 60 4 50 167 60 1 177 266 308 225 350 225 500 500 250 ev uoneuuoju BAU jeiueuiejddng Table A B 240 Volt AC Input Protection Devices See page A 13 for Notes Dual Motor Drive o HP PWM Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Catalog E Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker 9 Protector Range 6 Number ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max Min Max Max Max 8 Available Catalog Numbers 140 20BB2P2 0 0 5 0 33 4 50 17 07 22 24 3 8 3 6 3 10 15 3 M C2E B25 M D8E B25 20BB4P2 0 1 0 75 4 50 3 3 14 42 4 8 6 4 5 8 5 15 15 7 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BB6P8 1 2 15 4 50 5 9 24 6 8 9 12 10 15 10 25 25 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BB9P6 1 3 2 4 50 8 3 34 9 6 106 144 12 20 12 35 35 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BB015 1 5 3 4 50 13 7 5 7 153 168 23 20 30 20 60 60 30 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BB022 1 75 5 4 50 199 83 22 242 33 25 50 25 80 80 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BB028 2 10 7 5 4 50 25 7 10 7 28 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 20BB042 3
77. 0 Another slip test will be performed and will repeat continuously until A the load stops slipping or B the load reaches the ground This feature keeps control of the load and returns it to the ground in a controlled manner in the event of a mechanical brake failure Application Notes C 7 Speed Monitoring Speed Band Limit This routine is intended to fault the drive if the difference between the speed reference and the encoder feedback is larger than the value set in Spd Dev Band parameter 602 and the drive is NOT making any progress toward the reference SpdBand Integrat parameter 603 sets the time that the speed difference can be greater than the deviation band before causing a fault and setting the brake Float Float is defined as the condition when the drive is holding the load at zero hertz while holding off the mechanical brake The float condition starts when the frequency drops below the speed set in Float Tolerance parameter 606 Float will stay active for a period of time set by ZeroSpdFloatTime parameter 605 If a digital input parameters 361 366 is set to Micro Pos also Float and it is closed the Float condition will stay active and will disregard the timer This signal is also available through a communication device see TorqProve Setup parameter 601 Micro Position Micro Position refers to rescaling of the commanded frequency by a percentage entered in MicroPos Scale parameter 611 This
78. 0 0 30 0 Secs level set in Load Loss Level beforea Units 0 1 Secs fault occurs Shear Pin Time Default 0 0 Secs Sets the time that the drive is at or above Min Max 0 0 30 0 Secs current limit before a fault occurs Zero Units 0 1 Secs disables this feature CO eo Utility File rr Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Direction Mode Default Unipolar Bipolar Reverse Dis Mode Direction Change Unipolar Drive Logic Bipolar Sign of Reference Reverse Dis Not Changeable ATTENTION Drive damage can occur if proper input impedance A is not provided as explained below Related Related Ka IND Ic lO IO P SS We File UTILITY 19 mM HIM Ref Config 19 e 194 196 Drive Memory Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Save HIM Ref Enables a feature to save the present frequency reference value issued by the HIM to Drive memory on power loss Value is restored to the HIM on power up S S S aaa lx lx xix xix TT 1 Save at Power Down 0 Do Not Save pp 151413 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Man Ref Preload Default 0 Disabled Enables disables a feature to automati Options 0 Disabled ca
79. 0 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Base Speed Overspeed Overspeed Limit is a user programmable value that allows operation at maximum speed but also provides an overspeed band that will allow a speed regulator such as encoder feedback or slip compensation to increase the output frequency above maximum speed in order to maintain maximum motor speed The figure below illustrates a typical Custom V Hz profile Minimum Speed is entered in Hertz and determines the lower speed reference limit during normal operation Maximum Speed is entered in Hertz and determines the upper speed reference limit The two Speed parameters only limit the speed reference and not the output frequency The actual output frequency at maximum speed reference is the sum of the speed reference plus speed adder components from functions such as slip compensation The Overspeed Limit is entered in Hertz and added to Maximum Speed and the sum of the two Speed Limit limit the output frequency This sum Speed Limit must is compared to Maximum Frequency and an alarm is initiated which prevents operation if the Speed Limit exceeds Maximum Frequency C 12 Application Notes A Allowable Output Frequency Range 1 Bus Regulation or Current Limit on z Allowable Output Frequency Range Normal Operation zm l i 1 Allowable Speed Reference Range Maximum V l i H I Voltage a 1 1 Motor NP ee GESANG 1 i 1 1 1 Volta
80. 0 5 5 7 5 10 BUSSMANN_JKS 10 20BC8P7 1 4 3 0 9 3 50 87 9 9 13 2 20 BUSSMANN_JKS 20 20BC011 1155 4 126 68 115 13 174 25 BUSSMANN_JKS 25 20BC015 il 745 eo iS Je Je hee L Jew BUSSMANN_JKS 30 20BC022 1111 175 24 13 22 242 33 45 BUSSMANN JKS 45 20BC030 2e Jr ese ule Jeu 33 45 60 BUSSMANN JKS 60 20BC037 2118 5 15 409 22 1 37 45 60 80 BUSSMANN_JKS 80 20BC043 3 22 18 5 47 5 25 7 43 56 74 90 BUSSMANN_JKS 90 20BC056 3 30 22 619 33 4 56 64 86 110 BUSSMANN_JKS 110 20BC072 3 37 30 805 43 5 72 84 112 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 20BC085 4 37 805 43 5 72 108 144 150 BUSSMANN_JKS 150 45 951 151 3 85 94 128 200 BUSSMANN JKS 200 20BH105 5 45 951 513 85 128 170 200 BUSSMANN JKS 200 bb 117 4 63 4 105 116 158 200 BUSSMANN JKS 200 20BH125 0 5 45 91 9 63 7 96 144 168 150 55 139 8 75 5 125 138 163 225 BUSSMANN_JKS 225 20BH140 0 6 55 117 4 63 4 105 158 210 200 BUSSMANN JKS 200 75 158 4 85 6 140 154 210 300 BUSSMANN JKS 300 20BH170 0 6 75 158 4 85 6 140 210 280 300 BUSSMANN_JKS 300 90 192 4 103 9 170 187 255 350 BUSSMANN JKS 350 20BH205 6 90 192 4 103 9 170 255 313 350 BUSSMANN_JKS 350 110 232 125 3 205 220 289 400 BUSSMANN_JKS 400 1 Also applies to P voltage class Table A H 650 Volt DC Input Protection Devices A kw DC Input Gen Rating
81. 0 5000 Bs limit Units 1 3 150 Drive OL Mode Default 3 Both PWM tst 219 Kei S Selects the drive s response to Options 0 Disabled increasing drive temperature 1 Reduce CLim 2 Reduce PWM 3 Both PWM tst 151 PWM Frequency Default 4 kHz 2 kHz Sets the carrier frequency for the PWM output Drive derating may occur at Frames 4 6 600 690VAC higher carrier frequencies For derating Min Max 2 10 kHz information refer to the PowerFlex Units 2 4 8 10 kHz Reference Manual Important If parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to FVC Vector the drive will run at 2 kHz when operating below 6 Hz 3 32 Group File No Load Limits Stop Brake Modes Programming and Parameters 152 153 154 145 155 156 157 Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Droop RPM FLA Selects amount of droop that the speed reference is reduced when at full load torque Zero disables the droop function Important Selecting Slip Comp with parameter 080 in conjunction with parameter 152 may produce undesirable results Regen Power Limit Sets the maximum power limit allowed to transfer from the motor to the DC bus When using an external dynamic brake set this parameter to its maximum value Current Rate Limit Sets the largest allowable rate of change for the current reference signal This number is scaled in perce
82. 007 Analog In1 Value 016 Motor Data Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor NP FLA 042 Motor NP Power 045 Motor NP Hertz 043 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Torq Attributes Maximum Voltage 054 Maximum Freq 055 Volts per Hertz Start Acc Boost 069 Break Voltage 071 Run Boos 070 Break Frequency 072 Speed Spd Mode amp Speed Mode 080 Overspeed Limit 083 Command Limits Minimum Speed 081 Skip Frequency 1 084 Maximum Speed 082 Skip Freq Band 087 Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 References Speed Ref A H 091 Speed Dei A Lo 092 Discrete Preset Speed2 102 Speeds Dynamic Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 140 Control Decel Time 1 142 a Load Limits Current Lmt Val 148 Stop Brake Stop Mode A 155 Modes n Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Reset To Defalts 197 Language 201 Diagnostics Start Inhibits 214 Dig In Status 216 Dig Out Status 217 Inputs amp Analog Inputs Ang In Config 320 Analog IntLo 323 Outputs Anlg In Sqr Root 321 Anlg In 1 Loss 324 Analog In 1 Hi 322 EN Analog Outputs Anlg Out Config 340 Analog Out Hi 343 Analog Out Sel 342 Analog Out Lo 344 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out Sel 380 Dig Out2 Level 385 Digital Ou Sel 384 Dig Outi Level 381 1 Only available on Standard Control drives with firmware version 3 001 or above Programming and Par
83. 01 and later La DERON VS i i 23 Reserved 24 Disabled 2528 Scale Block1 4 2 29 Torque Stpt2 2 428 Torque Ref A Hi Default 100 096 053 432 Torque Ref B Hi 100 0 Scales the upper value of the Torque Ref Min Max 800 0 A Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 analog input 429 Torque Ref A Lo Default 0 0 053 433 Torque Ref B Lo 0 0 Scales the lower value of the Torque Ref Min Max 800 0 A Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 analog input 430 Torq Ref A Div Default 1 0 053 Defines the value of the divisor for the Min Max 0 1 3276 7 Torque Ref A Sel selection Units 0 1 434 Torque Ref B Mult Default 1 0 053 Defines the value of the multiplier for the Min Max 32767 0 Torque Ref B Sel selection Units 0 1 o Ee Z G o rc O E So o g E E E lt co o E No 435 436 437 441 06 eo 070 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Torque Setpoint Default 0 096 Torque Setpoint Mos 800 0 Provides an internal fixed value for Units 0 196 Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref Sel is set to Torque Setpt Pos Torque Limit Default 200 096 Defines the torque limit for the positive Min Max 0 0 800 0 torque reference value The reference will Units 0 1 not be allowed to exceed this value
84. 0V or 240V 5 100 VA 6 138 VA Figure 1 2 Typical Locations Phase Select Jumper amp Transformer Frame 5 shown 3 PH 1 PH Ta LINE TYPE DO D O spares U U SPARE 2 Phase Selection Jumper Fan Voltage 690 Volt Tap 600 Volt Tap 480 Volt Tap 400 Volt Tap 1 Frame 6 Transformer Tap Access The transformer is located behind the Power Terminal Block in the area shown in Figure 1 2 Access is gained by releasing the terminal block from the rail To release terminal block and change tap Installation Wiring 1 9 1 Locate the small metal tab at the bottom of the end block 2 Press the tab in and pull the top of the block out Repeat for next block if desired 3 Select appropriate transformer tap 4 Replace block s in reverse order Power Terminal Block Refer to Figure 1 3 for typical locations Table 1 C Power Terminal Block Specifications Wire Size Range Torque No Name Frame Description Maximum Minimum Maximum Recommended O Power Terminal 0 amp 1 Input power and 40mm 0 5 mm2 1 7 N m 0 8 N m Block motor connections 10 AWG 22 AWG 15 Ib in 7 Ib in 2 Input power and 10 0 mm 0 8mm2 1 7N m 1 4 N m motor connections 6 AWG 18 AWG 1
85. 1 Anlg Out Absolut 611 MicroPos Scale 342 345 Analog OutX Sel 343 346 Analog OutX Hi 344 347 Analog OutX Lo 354 355 Anlg OutX Scale 361 366 Digital InX Sel 377 378 Anlg OutX Geint 379 Dig Out Setpt 380 Digital OutX Sel 384 388 381 Dig OutX Level 385 389 382 Dig OutX OnTime 386 390 383 Dig OutX OffTime 387 391 412 Motor Fdbk Type 413 Encoder PPR 416 Fdbk Filter Sel 419 Notch Filter Freq 420 Notch Filter K 422 Pulse In Scale www rockwellautomation com Corporate Headquarters Rockwell Automation 777 East Wisconsin Avenue Suite 1400 Milwaukee WI 53202 5302 USA Tel 1 414 212 5200 Fax 1 414 212 5201 Headquarters for Allen Bradley Products Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas Rockwell Automation 1201 South Second Street Milwaukee WI 53204 2496 USA Tel 1 414 382 2000 Fax 1 414 382 4444 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation SA NV Vorstlaan Boulevard du Souverain 36 1170 Brussels Belgium Tel 32 2 663 0600 Fax 32 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific Rockwell Automation 27 F Citicorp Centre 18 Whitfield Road Causeway Bay Hong Kong Tel 852 2887 4788 Fax 852 2508 1846 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products Americas Rockwell Automation 6040 Ponders Court Greenville SC 29615 4617 USA Tel 1 864 297 4800 Fax 1 864 281 2433 Europe Middle East Africa Rockwell Automation Br hlstraBe 22 D 74834 Elztal Dallau Germany Tel
86. 11 Use Present Time X x Decel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Decel Time 1 10 Use Decel Time 2 11 Use Present Time X X xX Reference 000 No Command Select 001 Ref 1 Ref A Select 010 Ref 2 Ref B Select 011 Ref 3 Preset 3 100 Ref 4 Preset 4 101 Ref 5 Preset 5 110 Ref 6 Preset 6 111 Ref 7 Preset 7 D MOP 0 Not Decrement Decrement 1 Decrement Il A O Not Stop condition logic 0 must first be present before a 1 Start condition will start the drive The Start command acts as a momentary Start command A 1 will start the drive but returning to O will not stop the drive 2 This Start will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for 2 Wire Control option 7 8 or 9 3 This Reference Select will not function if a digital input parameters 361 366 is programmed for Speed Sel 1 2 or 3 option 15 16 or 17 Note that Reference Selection is Exclusive Ownership see Reference Owner on page 3 52 A 6 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A 2 Logic Status Word Logic Bits 15114113 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 0 Status x Ready Description 0 Not Ready 1 Ready x Active 0 Not Active 1 Active D Command Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward D Actual Direction 0 Reverse 1 Forward D Accel 0 N
87. 11 bit 8 sign 2k ohm 340 Anlg Volts Out 1 minimum load 344 Anlg Current Out 1 4 4 20mA 11 bit amp sign 400 ohm Anlg Current Out 1 maximum load Reserved for Future Use Digital Out 1 N C Fault Max Resistive Load 380 Digital Out 1 Common 240V AC 30V DC 1200VA 150W 387 Digital Out 1 NO NOT Fault Max Current 5A Min Load 10mA Digtal Ou MET NOT Run yr AC 30V DC 840VA 105W Digital Out 2 Common Max Current 3 5A Min Load 10mA Digital Out 2 N O Run Anlg Current In 1 Isolated 9 4 20mA 11 bit amp sign 320 Anlg Current In 1 124 ohm input impedance 327 Anlg Current In 2 2 Isolated 4 4 20mA 11 bit amp sign Anlg Current In 2 124 ohm input impedance 21 10V Pot Reference 2k ohm minimum 22 10V Pot Reference 23 Reserved for Future Use 24 24VDC Drive supplied logic input power 25 Digital In Common 26 24V Common 9 Common for internal power supply 27 Digital In 1 Stop CF 115V AC 50 60 Hz Opto isolated 361 28 Digital In 2 Start Low State less than 30V AC 366 29 Digital In 3 Auto Man High State greater than 100 AC x Dana Seed 1 LAS SO lie pe te 31 Digital In 5 Speed Sel 2 High State greater than 20V AC DC 32 Digital In 6 Speed Sel 3 11 2 mA DC Contacts in unpowered state Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to drive and deenergize drop out when a fau
88. 116 154 100 170 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 20BD125 5 100 4 50 117 97 6 125 138 163 150 250 150 500 375 150 75 4 50 90 1 749 96 144 168 125 200 125 350 350 125 E 20BD156 6 125 4 50 147 122 156 172 234 200 350 200 600 450 250 100 4 50 131 109 125 188 250 175 250 175 500 375 250 20BD180 6 150 4 50 169 141 180 198 270 225 400 225 600 500 250 125 4 50 147 122 156 234 312 200 350 200 600 450 250 Ka 20BD248 6 200 2 40 233 194 248 273 372 300 550 300 700 700 400 e 150 2 50 169 141 180 270 360 225 400 225 600 500 250 LL V Table A E 600 Volt AC Input Protection Devices See page A 13 for Notes Dual Motor Drive a HP PWM Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Catalog Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker 9 Protector 4 Range 5 6 Number ic ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max DI Min Max Max 8 Max Available Catalog Numbers 140 7 20BE1P7 0 1 05 4 50 1 8 14 17 2 2 6 2 4 2 6 15 3 M C2E B16 20BE2P7 0 2 1 4 50 2 1 21 27 3 6 48 3 6 3 10 15 3 M C2E B25 20BE3P9 0 3 g 4 50 3 0 31 39 43 5 9 6 9 6 15 15 7 M C2E B40 M D8E B40 20BE6P1 0 5 3 4 50 5 3 55 6
89. 127 PI Setpoint Process Pl 3 27 45 Motor NP Power Motor Data 3 15 128 PI Feedback Sel Process Pl 3 28 46 Mtr NP Pwr Units Motor Data 3 15 129 PI Integral Time Process Pl 3 28 47 Motor OL Hertz Motor Data 3 15 130 PI Prop Gain Process PI 3 28 48 Motor OL Factor Motor Data 3 15 181 PI Lower Limit Process PI 3 28 49 Motor Poles Motor Data 3 15 132 PI Upper Limit Process P 3 28 53 Motor Cntl Sel Torg Attributes 3 15 133 PI Preload Process Pl 3 28 Torque Perf Mode Torq Attributes 134 PI Status Process Pl 3 28 54 Maximum Voltage Torq Attributes 3 15 135 PI Ref Meter Process Pl 3 28 55 Maximum Freq Torg Attributes 3 16 136 Pl Fdback Meier Process P 3 28 56 Compensation Torq Attributes 3 16 137 PI Error Meter Process Pl 3 29 57 Flux Up Mode Torq Attributes 3 16 138 PI Output Meter Process P 3 29 58 Flux Up Time Torq Attributes 3 16 139 PI BW Filter Process P 3 29 59 SV Boost Filter Torq Attributes 3 16 140 141 Accel Time X Ramp Rates 3 31 61 Autotune Torq Attributes 3 17 142 143 Decel Time X Ramp Rates 3 31 62 IR Voltage Drop Torq Attributes 3 17 145 DB While Stopped Stop Brake Modes 3 32 63 Flux Current Ref Torq Attributes 3 17 146 S Curve Ramp Rates 3 31 64 Ixo Voltage Drop Torq Attributes 3 17 147 Current Lmt Sel Load Limits 3 31 66 Autotune Torque Torq Attributes 3 18 148 Current Lmt Val Load Limits 3 31 67 Inertia Autotune Torq Attributes 3 18 149 Current Lmt Gain Load Limits 3 31 69 Start Acc Boost Volts per Hertz 3 19 150 Dr
90. 146 Ramp Rates 3 31 Programming and Parameters 3 63 Parameter Name Number Group Page Parameter Name Number Group Page Save HIM Ref 192 HIM Ref Config 3 39 Total Inertia 450 Speed Regulator 3 30 Save MOP Ref 194 MOP Config 3 39 Trim Setpoint 116 Speed Trim 3 26 Save To User Set 199 Drive Memory 3 40 Trim Hi 119 Speed Trim 3 26 ScaleX In Hi 477 495 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Trim In Select 117 Speed Trim 3 26 ScaleX In Lo 478 496 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Trim Lo 120 Speed Trim 3 26 ScaleX In Value 476 494 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Trim Out Select 118 Speed Trim 3 26 ScaleX Out Hi 479 497 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Voltage Class 202 Drive Memory 3 40 ScaleX Out Lo 480 498 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Wake Level 180 Restart Modes 3 37 ScaleX Out Value 481 499 Scaled Blocks 3 48 Wake Time 181 Restart Modes 3 37 Shear Pin Time 189 Power Loss 3 38 ZeroSpdFloatTime 605 Torq Proving 3 60 Skip Freq Band 87 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 23 Skip Frequency X 84 86 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 23 Sleep Level 182 Restart Modes 3 37 Sleep Time 183 Restart Modes 3 37 Sleep Wake Mode 178 Restart Modes 3 36 Sleep Wake Ref 179 Restart Modes 3 37 Slip Comp Gain 122 Slip Comp 3 26 Slip RPM FLA 121 Slip Comp 3 26 Slip RPM Meter 123 Slip Comp 3 26 Speed Desired
91. 15 10 4 50 38 5 16 0 42 46 2 63 50 90 50 150 150 50 M F8E C45 CMN 6300 20BB052 3 20 15 4 50 47 7 19 8 52 63 80 60 100 60 200 200 100 CMN 6300 20BB070 4 25 20 4 50 642 26 7 70 78 105 90 150 90 275 275 100 B CMN 9000 20BB080 4 30 25 4 50 73 2 30 5 80 105 140 100 180 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 20BB104 5 40 4 50 98 40 6 104 115 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 SS 30 4 50 73 30 5 80 120 160 100 175 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 20BB130 5 50 4 50 122 150 7130 143 175 175 275 175 500 375 250 40 4 50 98 40 6 104 156 175 125 225 125 400 300 150 20BB154 6 60 4 50 145 160 1 154 169 231 200 300 200 600 450 250 50 4 50 122 1507130 195 260 175 275 175 500 375 250 20BB192 6 75 4 50 180 74 9 192 211 288 225 400 225 600 575 250 60 4 50 145 60 1 154 231 308 200 300 200 600 450 250 uomeuuoju BAU jeiueuiejddng ev Table A C 400 Volt AC Input Protection Devices See page A 13 for Notes Drive Catalog Number Frame Dual Motor kw PWM Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker 9 Protector 4 Range 6 ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max Min Max Max Mal Available Catalog Numbers 140
92. 16 158 125 225 125 400 300 150 45 M4 50 814 56 4 85 128 170 110 175 110 300 300 150 gt 20BC125 5 55 j 4 50 121 1 83 9 125 138 163 150 275 150 500 375 250 E 45 4 50 91 9 63 7 96 144 168 125 200 125 375 375 150 20BC140 5 75 4 40 136 93 9 140 154 190 200 300 200 400 400 250 55 4 40 101 69 6 105 157 190 150 225 150 300 300 150 20BC170 6 90 j 4 50 164 126 170 187 255 250 375 250 600 500 250 i 75 4 50 136 103 140 210 280 200 300 200 550 400 250 i 20BC205 6 110 4 40 199 148 205 220 289 250 450 250 600 600 400 90 4 40 164 126 170 255 313 250 375 250 600 500 250 a lt 20BC260 6 132 2 40 255 177 260 286 390 350 550 350 750 750 400 ka 110 2 50 199 138 205 308 410 250 450 250 600 600 400 0r v uomeuuoju BAU jeiueuiejddng Table A D 480 Volt AC Input Protection Devices See page A 13 for Notes UONEWJOJU eAu ejuawajddns Dual Motor Drive o HP PWM Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Catalog amp Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker Protector Bengel Number ICT ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max 2 Min Max Max 8 Max Available Catalog Nu
93. 20 000mA HEM 410 000V 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt Ka CH NI ee pari CO Ka gt I Ico Es IND co gt I co Es IND 3 56 Programming and Parameters File 377 378 INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Analog Outputs Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Anlg Out1 Scale Default 0 0 Anlg Out2 Scale wee Analog Out Sel Sets the high value for the range of Units 0 01 analog out scale Entering 0 0 will disable this scale and max scale will be used Example If Analog Out Sel Commanded Trq a value of 150 150 scale in place of the default 800 Anlgi Out Setpt Default 20 000 mA 10 000 Volts Anlg2 Out Setpt Min Max 0 000 20 000mA Sets the analog output value from a 10 000V communication device Example Set Units 0 001 mA Data In Ax to 377 value from 0 001 Volt communication device Then set Analog Outx Sel to Param Cntl Selected Option Definitions Analog Outx Sel Digital Inx Sel Digital Outx Sel Related Option Description Related At Speed Relay changes state when drive has reached commanded speed 380 Fast Stop When closed the drive will stop with a 0 1 second decel time If Torque Proving is 361 being used float will be ignored at end of ramp and the mechanical brake will be set Excl Link Links digital input to a digital
94. 2500 rad sec bandwidth Selectable Motor Control Sensorless Vector with full tuning Standard V Hz with full custom capability PF700 adds Vector Control Stop Modes Multiple programmable stop modes including Ramp Coast DC Brake Ramp to Hold and S curve Accel Decel Two independently programmable accel and decel times Each time may be programmed from 0 3600 seconds in 0 1 second increments Intermittent Overload 110 Overload capability for up to 1 minute 150 Overload capability for up to 3 seconds Current Limit Capability Proactive Current Limit programmable from 20 to 160 of rated output current Independently programmable proportional and integral gain Electronic Motor Overload Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response Investigated Protection by U L to comply with N E C Article 430 U L File E59272 volume 12 Encoder Type Incremental dual channel Supply 12V 250 mA 12V 10 mA minimum inputs isolated with differential transmitter 250 kHz maximum Quadrature 90 27 degrees at 25 degrees C Duty Cycle 50 10 Requirements Encoders must be line driver type quadrature dual channel or pulse single channel 8 15V DC output single ended or differential and capable of supplying a minimum of 10 mA per channel Maximum input frequency is 250 kHz The Encoder Interface Board accepts 12V DC square wave with a minimum high state voltage of 7 0V DC 12 volt encoder Maximum low state volt
95. 275 150 375 375 250 E cory UOIJEWOJU eAuq jeiueuiejddng Table A F 690 Volt AC Input Protection Devices Dual Motor Drive o KW PWM Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit Catalog amp Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker Protector 4 Number ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max 2 Min Max 2 Max 9 Max 8 20BF052 5 45 4 50 46 9 56 1 52 57 78 60 110 60 175 175 lal 50 40 1 480 46 69 92 50 90 50 150 150 20BF060 5 55 4 50 57 7 68 9 60 66 90 80 125 on 225 225 45 4 50 469 561 52 78 104 60 110 60 175 175 20BF082 5 75 l2 50 79 0 944 82 90 123 100 200 100 375 875 DN 50 577 689 60 90 120 80 125 80 225 225 20BF098 5 90 l2 40 947 113 98 108 127 125 200 125 375 375 175 2 40 79 0 944 82 123 140 100 200 100 375 375 20BF119 6 110 l2 50 115 137 119 131 179 150 250 150 400 90 2 50 94 7 113 98 147 196 125 200 125 375 20BF142 6 132 l2 50 138 165 142 156 213 175 300 175 450 J 110 2 50 115 137 119 179 238 150 250 150 400 Notes 1 Minimum protection device size is the lowest rated device that supplies maximum protection without nuisance tripping 2 Maximu
96. 3 E c i Load Limits Current Lmt Val 148 PWM Frequency 151 Stop Brake Stop Mode A 155 Modes Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Wake Time 181 Flying Start En 169 Sleep Wake Mode 178 Sleep Level 182 Flying StartGain 170 Sleep Wake Ref 179 Sleep Time 183 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Wake Level 180 Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss Time 185 Direction Config Direction Mode 190 HIM Ref Config Save HIM Ref 192 Man Ref Preload 193 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Reset To Defalts 197 Language 201 Diagnostics Start Inhibits 214 Dig Out Status 217 Dig In Status 216 Inputs amp Analog Inputs Ang In Config 320 Analog In 2 Hi 325 Anlg In T Loss 324 Outputs Anlg In Sqr Root 321 AnalogIniLo 323 Anlg In2Loss 327 Analog In 1 Hi 322 Analog In2Lo 326 Analog Outputs Anlg Out Config 340 Analog Out Hi 343 Analog Out Gel 342 Analog Out Lo 344 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out Sel 380 Dig Out2 Level 385 Dig Out OffTime 383 Digital Out2 Sel 384 Dig Outi OnTime 382 Dig Out2 OffTime 387 Dig Outi Level 381 Dig Out2 OnTime 386 1 Only available on Standard Control drives with firmware version 3 001 or above 3 12 Group File No Metering Programming and Parameters Monitor File m 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Output Freq Output frequency
97. 3 52 216 Dig In Status Diagnostics 3 43 294 Decel Owner Masks amp Owners 3 52 217 Dig Out Status Diagnostics 3 43 295 Fault Clr Owner Masks amp Owners 3 52 218 Drive Temp Diagnostics 3 43 296 MOP Owner Masks 4 Owners 3 52 219 Drive OL Count Diagnostics 3 43 297 Local Owner Masks 8 Owners 3 52 220 Motor OL Count Diagnostics 3 44 298 DPI Ref Select Comm Control 3 50 224 Fault Frequency Diagnostics 3 44 299 DPI Fdbk Select Comm Control 3 50 Fault Speed Diagnostics 300 307 Data In XX Datalinks 3 52 225 Fault Amps Diagnostics 3 44 310 317 Data Out XX Datalinks 3 53 226 Fault Bus Volts Diagnostics 3 44 320 Anlg In Config Analog Inputs 3 53 227 228 Status X Fault Diagnostics 3 44 321 Anlg In Sqr Root Analog Inputs 3 53 229 230 Alarm X Fault Diagnostics 3 45 322 325 Analog In X Hi Analog Inputs 3 54 3 66 Programming and Parameters Number Parameter Name Group Page Number Parameter Name Group Page 323 326 Analog In X Lo Analog Inputs 3 54 602 Spd Dev Band Torq Proving 3 60 324 327 Analog In X Loss Analog Inputs 3 54 603 SpdBand Integrat Torq Proving 3 60 340 Anlg Out Config Analog Outputs 3 54 604 Brk Release Time Torq Proving 3 60 341 Anlg Out Absolut Analog Outputs 3
98. 378 tr 28 0 1 10 44 0 1 73 lt gt 66 4 2 61 I 128 0 6 04 gt 232 3 9 15 A 22 Supplemental Drive Information Frame Rating Dimensions 6 All 34 9 1 37 Dia 22 2 0 87 Dia 56 2 2 21 gt 3 Places 62 7 2 47 Dia 4 Places 458 1 80 gt S Removable Junction Box i FA RE NY LINE A LY NM Pa P h 219 0 E j 8 62 T 185 4 1 1 7 30 i i 151 8 5 98 n 474 1 85 2 52 1 2 05 E 69 1 2 72 gt lt 130 1 5 12 lt 230 1 9 06 lt 280 1 11 03 lt 330 1 13 00 Frame Cross Reference Table A I PowerFlex 700 Frames a AC Input E 208 240 400V 480V 600V NDHP HDHP ND kW HD kW NDHP HDHP NDHP HD HP HD HP 0 0 5 033 037 025 05 033 0 33 1 075 0 75 055 H 075 l 0 75 15 075 13 15 15 22 15 3 2 2 4 22 5 3 3 5 5 4 75 5 5 T 2 15 75 5 5 10 7 5 10 75 75 3 2 11 7 5 15 10 15 10 10 5 3 7 5 5 2 10 7 5 15 11 20 15 20 15 15 185 15 25 20 25 20 20 3 15 10 22 185 130 25 30 25 25 20 15 30 22 40 30 40 30 30 37 30 50 40 50 40 40 4 25 20 45 37 60 50 60 50 50 30 25 5 40 30 55 45 75 60 75 60 60 50 40 100 75 100 75 75 6 60 50 75 55 125 100
99. 481 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 441 Volts per Hertz Start Acc Boost 069 Break Voltage 071 Run Boost 070 Break Frequency 072 Speed Motor Fdbk Type 412 Fdbk Filter Sel 416 Marker Pulse 421 Feedback Encoder PPR 413 Notch Filter Freq 419 Pulse In Scale 422 Enc Position Fdbk 414 Notch Filter K 420 Encoder Z Chan 423 Encoder Speed 415 Spd Mode amp Speed Units 079 Overspeed Limit 083 Skip Freq Band 087 Limits Feedback Select 080 Skip Frequency 1 084 Speed Torque Mod 088 Minimum Speed 081 Skip Frequency 2 085 Rev Speed Limit 454 Maximum Speed 082 Skip Frequency 3 086 Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed Ref B H 094 TB Man Ref Hi 097 References Speed Ref A H 091 Speed RefBLo 095 TB Man Het Lo 098 Speed Dei A Lo 092 TB Man Ref Sel 096 Pulse Input Ref 099 Speed Ref B Sel 093 Discrete Jog Speed 1 100 Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Jog Speed 2 108 Speeds Speed Trim Trim In Select 117 Trim Hi 119 Trim Setpoint 1163 Trim Out Select 118 Trim Lo 120 Slip Comp Slip RPM FLA 121 Slip Comp Gain 122 Slip RPM Meter 123 Process Pl PI Configuration 124 PI Lower Limit 181 Pl Output Meter 138 PI Control 125 Pl Upper Limit 132 Pl Reference Hi 460 Pl Reference Gel 126 PI Preload 133 Pl Reference Lo 461 PI Setpoint 127 PI Status 134 Pl Feedback Hi 462 Pl Feedback Sel 128 PI Ref Meter 135 Pl Feedback Lo 463 Pl Integral Time 129 Pl Fdback Meter 136 PI BW Filter 1392x PI Prop Gain 130 PI Error Meter 137 PI Deriv Time 4593x Speed Ki Speed Loop 445 Kf
100. 49 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 53 Applications File 3 59 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 61 Parameter Cross Reference by Number 3 64 About Parameters To configure a drive to operate in a specific way drive parameters may have to be set Three types of parameters exist e ENUM Parameters ENUM parameters allow a selection from 2 or more items The LCD HIM will display a text message for each item e Bit Parameters Bit parameters have individual bits associated with features or conditions If the bit is 0 the feature is off or the condition is false If the bit is 1 the feature is on or the condition is true e Numeric Parameters These parameters have a single numerical value i e 0 1 Volts The example on the following page shows how each parameter type is presented in this manual 3 2 Programming and Parameters 0000 2 ir a E 9 G 2 Parameter Name amp Description Values 198 Load Frm Usr Set Default 0 Ready 199 Loads a previously saved set of Options 0 Ready 2 parameter values from a selected user 1 User Set 1 O 5 set location in drive nonvolatile memory 2 User Set 2 to active drive memory 3 User Set 3 216 Dig In Status Ka A N G Se of the digital S ee gt llo olo olo rhegfegg 5 pis 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 vier Bit 1434 Torque Ref B Mult
101. 5 Ib in 12 Ib in 3 Input power and 25 0mm 2 5 mm 3 6N m 1 8N m motor connections 3 AWG 14 AWG 32 Ib in 16 Ib in BR1 2 terminals 10 0 mm 0 8 mm 11 7 N 1 4 N m 6 AWG 18 AWG 15 Ib in 12 Ib in 4 Input power and 35 0 mm 10 mm 4 0N m 40 N m motor connections 1 0 AWG 8 AWG 35 Ib in 35 Ib in 5 Input power BR1 50 0 mm 2 5 mm 75 HP 2 DC DC and 1 0 AWG 14 AWG motor connections PE 50 0 mm 16 0 mm 1 0 AWG 6 AWG 5 Input power DC 70 0 mm 25 0 mm See Note 2 100 HP DC and motor 2 0 AWG 4 AWG BR1 2 terminals 50 0 mm 2 5 mm 1 0 AWG 14 AWG PE 50 0 mm2 16 0 mm 1 0 AWG 6 AWG 6 Input power DC 120 0 mm 2 5 mm 6 N m 6 N m DC BR1 2 PE 4 0 AWG 14 AWG 52 Ib in 52 Ib in motor connections SHLD Terminal 0 6 Terminating point z 16N m 1 6N m for wiring shields 14 Ib in 14 Ib in AUX Terminal 0 4 Auxiliary Control 1 5 mm 0 2 mm Block Voltage 16 AWG 24 AWG 56 PS4PS O 40mm2 Q5mm L6N m 0 6N m 12 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 Ib in 5 3 Ib in O Fan Terminal 5 6 User Supplied Fan 4 0 mm2 0 5mm2 0 6 N m 0 6N m Block CB Only Voltage page 1 8 12 AWG 22 AWG 5 3 Ib in 5 3 Ib in DT Maximum minimum sizes that the terminal block will accept these are not recommendations 0 Refer to the terminal block label inside the drive 3
102. 54 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime Torq Proving 3 60 342 345 Analog OutX Sel Analog Outputs 3 55 606 Float Tolerance Torq Proving 3 60 343 346 Analog OutX Hi Analog Outputs 3 55 607 Brk Set Time Torq Proving 3 60 344 347 Analog OutX Lo Analog Outputs 3 55 608 TorqLim SlewRate Torq Proving 3 60 354 355 Anlg OutX Scale Analog Outputs 3 56 609 BrkSlip Count Torq Proving 3 60 361 366 Digital InX Sel Digital Inputs 3 57 610 Brk Alarm Travel Torq Proving 3 60 377 378 Anlg OutX Setpt Analog Outputs 3 56 611 MicroPos Scale Torq Proving 3 60 379 Dig Out Setpt Digital Outputs 3 58 380 Digital OutX Sel Digital Outputs 3 58 384 388 381 Dig OutX Level Digital Outputs 3 58 385 389 382 Dig OutX OnTime Digital Outputs 3 59 386 390 383 Dig OutX OffTime Digital Outputs 3 59 387 391 412 Motor Fdbk Type Speed Feedback 3 20 413 Encoder PPR Speed Feedback 3 20 414 Enc Position Fdbk Speed Feedback 3 20 415 Encoder Speed Speed Feedback 3 20 416 Fdbk Filter Sel Speed Feedback 3 20 419 Notch Filter Freq Speed Feedback 3 20 420 Notch Filter K Speed Feedback 3 21 421 Marker Pulse Speed Feedback 3 21 422 Pulse In Scale Speed Feedback 3 21 423 Encoder Z Chan Speed Feedback 3 21 427 431 Torque Ref X Gel Torq Attributes 3 18 428 432 Torque Ref X Hi Torq Attributes 3 18 429 433 Torque Ref X Lo Torq Attributes 3 18 430 Torq Ref A Div Torq Attributes 3 18 434 To
103. Attributes 3 19 Fault 1 Code 243 Faults 3 46 Control SW Ver 29 Drive Data 3 14 Fault 1 Time 244 Faults 3 47 Current Lmt Gain 149 Load Limits 3 31 Fault 2 Code 245 Faults 3 46 Current Lmt Sel 147 Load Limits 3 31 Fault 2 Time 246 Faults 3 47 Current Lmt Val 148 Load Limits 3 31 Fault 3 Code 247 Faults 3 46 Current Rate Limit 154 Load Limits 3 32 Fault 3 Time 248 Faults 3 47 Data In XX 300 307 Datalinks 3 52 Fault 4 Code 249 Faults 3 46 Data Out XX 310 317 Datalinks 3 53 Fault 4 Time 250 Faults 3 47 DB Resistor Type 163 Stop Brake Modes 3 34 Fault 5 Code 251 Faults 3 46 DB While Stopped 145 Stop Brake Modes 3 32 Fault 5 Time 252 Faults 3 47 DC Brake Level 158 Stop Brake Modes 3 33 Fault 6 Code 253 Faults 3 46 DC Brake Time 159 Stop Brake Modes 3 33 Fault 6 Time 254 Faults 3 47 DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Stop Brake Modes 3 32 Fault 7 Code 255 Faults 3 46 DC Bus Memory 13 Metering 3 13 Fault 7 Time 256 Faults 3 47 DC Bus Voltage 12 Metering 3 13 Fault 8 Code 257 Faults 3 46 Decel Mask 282 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Fault 8 Time 258 Faults 3 47 3 62 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name Number
104. BUSSMANN_JKS 200 20BR125 1 5 75 105 3 68 3 96 144 168 200 BUSSMANN_JKS 200 100 137 1 88 9 125 138 163 250 BUSSMANN_JKS 250 20BR156 1 6 100 137 1 88 9 125 188 250 250 BUSSMANN JKS 250 125 171 2 110 9 156 172 234 300 BUSSMANN_JKS 300 20BR180 0 6 125 171 2 110 9 156 234 312 300 BUSSMANN JKS 300 150 204 1 1322 180 198 270 400 BUSSMANN JKS 400 9 Also applies to J voltage class Dimensions Figure A 3 PowerFlex 700 Frames 0 3 0 Frame Shown lt A gt 15 0 0 59 gt lt D 5 8 0 23 dia see below lt C A ke M1 T e p o Mii B 2 E r d L Jp oo d E gt b d p Tope d U 115 5 0 22 Frames 0 1 8 0 7 0 0 28 Frames 2 3 0 31 3 Places Dimensions are in millimeters and inches Weight 2 kg be 5 Drive amp LA B C D E Drive Packaging 0 110 0 4 33 336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 80 0 3 15 320 0 12 60 5 22 11 5 8 16 18 1 1135 0 5 31 336 0 13 23 200 0 7 87 105 0 4 13 320 0 12 60 7 03 15 5 9 98 22 2 222 0 8 74 342 5 13 48 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 320 0 12 60 12 52 27 6 15 20 33 5 3 222 0 8 74 517 5 20 37 200 0 7 87 192 0 7 56 500 0 19 69 18 55 40 9 22 68 50 A 16 Supplemental Drive Information Figure A A PowerFlex 700 Frame 4 15 0 0 59 7 0 0 28 dia als eH y EE Powerflex 008
105. C U V W R S Tt T2 T9 L1 L2 L3 T Installation Wiring 1 11 Note Shaded BR1 4 BR2 Terminals will only be present on drives ordered with the Brake Option 650V Inp 75 HP Normal Duty 75 HP Normal Duty AN SS OO 010 OJOJO O ojojo oJojojo OJOJIOJIO E o oi 3 c sere Sa SiS o o o OJO O O OJOIOJO ojojo Olo O O QlIOIO O Fa PS e T Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP 15A14F gt Common Bus Drives w Precharge Only 100 HP Normal Duty 100 HP Normal Duty T au so ma l a EE ero DC E um wm WP o A x Beal O o ojo irch O O O O 0 FORO Sl e GI 3 o c s El i E EEE o o gle ojo olod o 0o50 o o e0 7 E re Precharge Resistor Fuse FWP 15A14F Common Bus Drives w Precharge Only 125 200 HP Normal Duty DC Wf DC ORGUE SE RUE ENAT M8 Stud All Terminals Max Lug Width 25 4 mm 1 in Common Mode Capacitor amp MOV Jumpers E Input Filter Capacitor o
106. Closed Wake Signal 4 Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode New Start or Run Cmd 4 Analog Sig gt Sleep Level 6 Invert Mode Analog Sig lt Sleep Level 6 New Start or Run Cmd 4 Run Run Closed New Run Cmd Run Closed New Run Cmd Run For Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Run Rev 1 When power is cycled if all of the above conditions are present after power is restored restart will occur 2 fall of the above conditions are present when Sleep Wake Mode is enabled the drive will start 3 The active speed reference is determined as explained in Reference Control on page 1 22 The Sleep Wake function and the speed reference may be assigned to the same input Command must be issued from HIM TB or network Run Command must be cycled Signal does not need to be greater than wake level Vector firmware 3 xxx amp later For Invert function refer to Analog In x Loss Yous File Group No Restart Modes Power Loss 179 180 181 182 183 177 184 185 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Sleep Wake Ref Selects the source of the input controlling the Sleep Wake function Wake Level Defines the analog input level that will start the drive Wake Time Defines the amount of time at or above Wake Level before a Start is issued Sleep Level Defines the analog
107. DC 1200VA 150W 391 13_ Digital Out M NOT Faut 7 eks EEN m ve ax Inductive Load 14 Digital Out 2 NC NOT Run 340V AC 30V DC 840VA 105W 15 _ Digital Out 2 3 Com Max Current 3 5A Min Load 10mA 16 Digital Out 3 N O 4 Run 17 CurrentIn Jumper Placing a jumper across terminals 18 Analog In 1 17 amp 18 or 19 amp 20 will configure 19 Current In Jumper that analog input for current 29 Analog In 2 21 10V Pot Reference 2k ohm minimum load 22 10V Pot Reference 23 Reserved for Future Use 24 4 24VDC 6 Drive supplied logic input power 25 Digital In Common 26 24V Common Common for internal power supply 27 Digital In 1 Stop CF 115V AC 50 60 Hz Opto isolated 361 28 Digital In 2 Start Low State less than 30V AC 366 29 Digital In 3 Auto Man High State greater than 100V AC me 24V DC Opto isolated ca Digital ns Speed Sel 1 Low State less than 5V DC 31 Digital In 5 Speed Sel 2 High State greater than 20V DC 32 Digital In 6 Hardware Speed Sel 3 11 2 mA DC Enable see pg 1 19 Important 4 20mA operation requires a jumper at terminals 17 amp 18 or 19 amp 20 Drive damage may occur if jumper is not installed These inputs outputs are dependant on a number of parameters see Related Parameters Differential Isolation External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE Input provides high c
108. Desired BW is set to 0 when a manual adjustment is made to this parameter Kf Speed Loop Controls the feed forward gain of the speed regulator Setting the Kf gain greater than zero reduces speed feedback overshoot in response to a step change in speed reference Speed Desired BW Sets the speed loop bandwidth and determines the dynamic behavior of the speed loop As bandwidth increases the speed loop becomes more responsive and can track a faster changing speed reference Adjusting this parameter will cause the drive to calculate and change Ki Speed Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains Total Inertia Represents the time in seconds for a motor coupled to a load to accelerate from zero to base speed at rated motor torque The drive calculates Total Inertia during the autotune inertia procedure Adjusting this parameter will cause the drive to calculate and change Ki Speed Loop and Kp Speed Loop gains Speed Loop Meter Value of the speed regulator output Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 6 3 0 0 200 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 1 0 0 Radians Sec 0 0 250 0 Radians Sec 0 1 Radians Sec 1 25 Secs 0 10 Secs HEM 0 1 600 0 Secs 0 01 600 00 mam 0 1 Secs 0 01 Secs Ir Read Only 800 0 Hz RPM 0 1 Hz RPM Related o SA IG o SA I2
109. Disabled Enables disables the Sleep Wake Options 0 Disabled function Important When enabled the 1 Direct Enabled o following conditions must be met 2 Invert Enabled e A proper value must be programmed for Sleep Level amp Wake Level e A speed reference must be selected in Speed Ref A Sel e Atleast one of the following must be programmed and input closed in Digital Inx Sel Enable Stop CF Run Run Forward Run Reverse ATTENTION Enabling the Sleep Wake function can cause d unexpected machine operation during the Wake mode Equipment damage and or personal injury can result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do Not use this function without considering the information below and in Appendix C In addition all applicable local national amp international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines must be considered Conditions Required to Start Drive 1 2 3 o eo IS After Power Up After a Drive Fault After a Stop Command z Reset by Stop CF Reset by Clear 5 Input HIM or TB Faults TB HIM or TB o Stop Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed Stop Closed ra Wake Signal Wake Signal Wake Signal Direct Mode New Start or Run Cmd 4 Analog Sig gt Sleep Level 6 Invert Mode Analog Sig lt Sleep Level 6 New Start or Run Cmd 4 Enable Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable Closed Enable
110. Drive Status 4 2 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 Fault Descriptions 4 4 Clearing Alarms 4 9 Alarm Descriptions 4 10 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions 4 13 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 16 Faults and Alarms A fault is a condition that stops the drive There are three fault types Type Fault Description CD Auto Reset Run When this type of fault occurs and Auto Rstrt Tries see page 3 35 is set to a value greater than 0 a user configurable timer Auto Rstrt Delay see page 3 35 begins When the timer reaches zero the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted Q Non Resettable This type of fault normally requires drive or motor repair The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared The fault will be reset on power up after repair User Configurable These faults can be enabled disabled to annunciate or ignore a fault condition An alarm is a condition that if left untreated may stop the drive There are two alarm types Type Alarm Description O User Configurable These alarms can be enabled or disabled through Alarm Config 1 on page 3 47 Q Non Configurable These alarms are always enabled 4 2 Troubleshooting Drive Status The condition or state of your drive is constantly monitored Any changes will be indicated thr
111. E compliance provided in this section if necessary e Conformity of the drive with CE EMC requirements does not guarantee an entire machine or installation complies with CE EMC requirements Many factors can influence total machine installation compliance e PowerFlex drives generate conducted low frequency disturbances harmonic emissions on the AC supply system 1 CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600V class drives 1 26 Installation Wiring General Notes continued e More information regarding harmonic emissions can be found in the PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual publication PFLEX RMO01 e When operated on a public supply system it is the responsibility of the installer or user to ensure by consultation with the distribution network operator and Rockwell Automation if necessary that applicable requirements have been met Essential Requirements for CE Compliance Conditions 1 6 listed below must be satisfied for PowerFlex drives to meet the requirements of EN61800 3 1 Standard PowerFlex 700 CE compatible Drive 2 Review important precautions attention statements throughout this manual before installing the drive Grounding as described on page 1 4 4 Output power control I O and signal wiring must be braided shielded cable with a coverage of 75 or better metal conduit or equivalent attenuation 5 All shielded cables should terminate with the proper shielded connector 6 C
112. Enabled Vector Control Option Only requires setting parameter 125 bit 0 to 1 Enabled PI Configuration Sets configuration of the PI regulator H x S e SS o e d SAS SSSEESES LES x xix x xix o o o ojo o o o o o p Frabied pits 14 18 12 11 10 98 7 65 4 3 21 0 x Reserved Bit 4 Vector Control Option Only Factory Default Bit Values Vector firmware 3 001 amp later PI Control Controls the Pl regulator gt ES ELS WR x x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 1 Enabled pris 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 765 4 3 2 1 0 0 Disabled x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values PI Reference Sel Default 0 Pl Setpoint Selects the source of the Pl reference Options 0 PI Setpoint 1 Vector firmware 3 001 and later 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 3 6 Reserved 7 Pulse In 8 Encoder 9 MOP Level 10 Master Ref 11 17 Preset Spd1 7 1822 DPI Port 1 5 2324 Reserved 25 Scale Block 1 26 Scale Block 2 27 Scale Block 3 1 28 Scale Block 4 PI Setpoint Default 50 0096 Provides an internal fixed value for Min Max 100 00 of Maximum process setpoint when PI Reference Sel Process Value is set to PI Setpoint Units 0 0196 3 27 Related Io IGO CH 024 124 thru 138 124 thru 138 3 28 G ES
113. IM Important Some parameters will have two unit values e Analog inputs can be set for current or voltage with Anlg In Config param 320 e Setting Speed Units parameter 79 on Vector Control drives selects Hz or RPM e Values that pertain to Vector Control drives only will be indicated by team or tam for Vector firmware 3 xxx and later Important When sending values through DPI ports simply remove the decimal point to arrive at the correct value i e to send 5 00 Hz use 500 Related Lists parameters if any that interact with the selected parameter The symbol indicates that additional parameter information is available in Appendix C Programming and Parameters 3 3 How Parameters are Organized The LCD HIM displays parameters in a File Group Parameter or Numbered List view order To switch display mode access the Main Menu press ALT then Sel while cursor is on the parameter selection In addition using Param Access Lvl the user has the option to display all parameters commonly used parameters or diagnostic parameters Control Options Standard Control Option Two different control options are available for the PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector The Standard Control option provides typical Volts per Hertz and Sensorless Vector operation The Vector Control option provides the added capability of FVC Vector control The cassette determines the type of control
114. Inputs amp Analog Inputs Anlg In Config 320 Analog In1 2Hi 322 325 Analog Int 2 Loss 324 327 Outputs Anlg In Sqr Root 321 Analog Int 2Lo 323 326 Analog Outputs Anlg Out Config 340 Analog Out 2 Hi 343 346 Ang Out1 2 Scal 354 3553x Anlg Out Absolut 341 Analog Out1 2 Lo 344 347 Anlg Out Setpt 377 3783x Analog Out 2 Sel 342 345 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out Sel 380 384 388 3793x Dig Out Level 381 385 389 Dig Out OnTime 382 386 390 Dig Out OffTime 383 387 391 Dig Out Setpt Applications3 Tord Proving TorqProve Cnfg 6003 Brk Release Time 6043 TorqLim SlewRate 6083x ims TorgProve Setup 6013 ZeroSpdFloatTime 6053 BrkSlip Count 6093x Spd Dev Band 6023x Float Tolerance 6063 Brk Alarm Travel 6103x SpdBand Integrat 6033 Brk Set Time 6073 MicroPos Scale 6113x These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 2 or 3 These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 4 2x Firmware 2 001 amp later only 3x Firmware 3 001 amp later only 3 10 Programming and Parameters Basic Fan Pump Parameter View U Standard Control Option Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 3 Fan Pump File Group Parameters Monitor Metering Output Freq 001 Elapsed MWh 009 2 Commanded Freq 002 Elapsed Run Time 010 Msi Output Current 003 DC Bus Voltage 012 Output Power
115. MI RFI Filter Grounding RFI Filter 1 4 Enc Position Fdbk 3 20 Enclosure Rating 1 2 Encoder Loss Fault 4 5 Encoder PPR 3 20 Encoder Quad Err Fault 4 5 Encoder Speed 3 20 Encoder Terminal Block 1 16 1 19 Encoder Wiring 1 19 Encoder Z Chan 3 21 ESD Static Discharge P 3 Excessive Load Fault 4 5 External Brake Resistor C 1 F Factory Defaults Resetting to 3 40 Index 4 Fan Pump Parameter Set 3 39 Fault amp Alarm Types 4 1 Fault 1 Time 3 47 Fault Amps 3 44 Fault Bus Volts 3 44 Fault Clear 3 46 Fault Clear Mode 3 46 Fault Clr Mask 3 51 Fault Config x 3 46 Fault Descriptions 4 4 Fault Frequency 3 44 Fault Queue B 4 Fault Speed 3 44 Fault x Code 3 46 Faults Analog In Loss 4 4 Anlg Cal Chksum 4 4 Auto Rstrt Tries 4 4 AutoTune Aborted 4 4 Auxiliary Input 4 4 Cntl Bd Overtemp 4 4 DB Resistance 4 4 Decel Inhibit 4 5 DPI Port 1 5 4 7 Drive Overload 4 5 Drive Powerup 4 5 Encoder Loss 4 5 Encoder Quad Err 4 5 Excessive Load 4 5 Faults Cleared 4 5 Fit QueueCleared 4 5 FluxAmpsRef Rang 4 5 Ground Fault 4 5 Hardware Fault 4 5 Heatsink OvrTemp 4 5 HW OverCurrent 4 6 1 0 Comm Loss 4 6 1 0 Failure 4 6 1 0 Mismatch 4 6 Incompat MCB PB 4 6 Input Phase Loss 4 6 IR Volts Range 4 6 IXo VoltageRange 4 6 Load Loss 4 6 Motor Overload 4 6 Motor Thermistor 4 6 NVS I O Checksum 4 6 NVS I O Failure 4 6 Output PhaseLoss 4 7 OverSpeed Limit 4 7 OverVoltage
116. Min Max Maximum Speed Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Default Read Only Min Max 0 0 Based on Drive Rating Units 0 1 VDC Default Read Only Min Max 0 0 Based on Drive Rating Units 0 1 VDC Default Read Only Min Max 0 0 429496729 5 kWh Units 0 1 kWh Default Read Only Min Max 0 000 20 000 mA 10 000V Units 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt Default Read Only Min Max 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Default Read Only Min Max 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Default Read Only Min Max 800 0 Units 0 1 Default Read Only Min Max 400 0 Hz 24000 0 RPM Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM 3 13 Related Io Z Ico o Z Ico o Z Ico o 57 Co 3 14 Programming and Parameters cs Parameter Name amp Description S O Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 026 Rated kW Default Read Only SS Drive power rating Min Max 0 00 3000 00 kW Units 0 01 kW 027 Rated Volts Default Read Only The drive input voltage class 208 240 Min Max 0 0 6553 5 VAC E 400 etc 0 0 65535 0 VAC s Units 0 1 VAC g 028 Rated Amps Default Read Only The drive rated output current Min Max 0 0 6553 5 Amps 0 0 65535 0 Amps Units 0 1 Amps 029 Control SW Ver Default Read Only 196 Main Control Board software version Min Max 0 000 256 256 0 000 65535 000 Units 0 001 Motor Control File Kl o S Parameter Name
117. N E C Other country state or local codes may require different ratings Fusing Tf fuses are chosen as the desired protection method refer to the recommended types listed below If available amp ratings do not match the tables provided the closest fuse rating that exceeds the drive rating should be chosen e EC BS88 British Standard Parts 1 amp 2 EN60269 1 Parts 1 8 2 type gG or equivalent should be used e UL UL Class CC T RK1 or J must be used Circuit Breakers The non fuse listings in the following tables include both circuit breakers inverse time or instantaneous trip and 140M Self Protecting Motor Starters If one of these is chosen as the desired protection method the following requirements apply e IEC and UL Both types of devices are acceptable for IEC and UL installations 1 Typical designations include but may not be limited to the following Parts 1 amp 2 AC AD BC BD CD DD ED EFS EF FF FG GF GG GH Gm Table A A 208 Volt AC Input Protection Devices See page A 13 for Notes Dual Motor Drive o HP PWM Input Element Time Non Time Circuit Circuit 140M Motor Starter with Adjustable Current Catalog E Rating Freq Temp Ratings Output Amps Delay Fuse Delay Fuse Breaker 9 Protector 4 Range Gig Number i ND HD kHz C Amps kVA Cont 1 Min 3 Sec Min Max Min Max Max
118. NOT be energized brake remains set The drive will then provide the motor with flux as well as perform a check for current flow through all three motor phases This ensures that torque will be delivered to the load when the mechanical brake is released When torque proving is enabled open phase loss detection is performed regardless of the setting of Bit 12 of Fault Config 1 parameter 238 If the drive passes all tests the brake will be released and the drive will take control of the load after the programmed time in Brk Release Time parameter 604 which is the typical mechanical release time of the brake Brake Proving When the drive receives a stop command to end a lifting operation the following actions occur 1 The brake is commanded closed when the speed of the motor reaches zero After the time period programmed in Brk Set Time parameter 607 the drive will verify if the brake is capable of holding torque It will do this by ramping the torque down at a rate set in TorqLim SlewRate parameter 608 Note that the drive can be started again at any time without waiting for either of the above timers to finish While the torque is ramping down the drive will perform a brake slip test If movement exceeds the limit set in BrkSlip Count parameter 609 then an alarm is set and the drive will start a brake slip procedure The drive will allow the motor to travel the distance programmed Brk Alarm Travel parameter 61
119. Neg Torque Limit Default 200 0 Defines the torque limit for the negative Min Max 800 0 0 0 torque reference value The reference will Units 0 1 not be allowed to exceed this value Torque Setpoint2 Default 0 096 Provides an internal fixed value for Min Max 800 0 Torque Setpoint when Torque Ref Sel is Units 0 1 set to Torque Setpt 2 Control Status Read Only Displays a summary status of any condition that may be limiting either the current or the torque reference 0 1 Condition True 0 0 Condition False x Reserved olo 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x x x x x x x x x x x pal 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 x Reserved Bit Mtr Tor Cur Ref Default Read Only Displays the torque current reference Min Max 32767 0 Amps value that is present at the output of the Units 0 01 Amps current rate limiter parameter 154 Start Acc Boost Default Based on Drive Rating Sets the voltage boost level for starting Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x 0 25 and acceleration when Custom V Hz Units 0 1 VAC mode is selected Refer to parameter 083 Overspeed Limit Run Boost Default Based on Drive Rating Sets the boost level for steady state or Min Max 0 0 Motor NP Volts x 0 25 deceleration when Fan Pmp V Hz or Units 0 1 VAC
120. No Diagnostics Programming and Parameters 220 224 225 226 227 228 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Motor OL Count Default Read Only Accumulated percentage of motor Min Max 0 0 100 0 overload Continuously operating the Units 0 1 motor over 100 of the motor overload setting will increase this value to 100 and cause a drive fault SAELE Fault Frequency Default Read Only Captures and displays the output speed Min Max 0 0 Maximum Freq of the drive at the time of the last fault Units 0 1 Hz Fault Speed Default Read Only See description above Min Max 0 0 Maximum Freq 0 0 Maximum Speed Units 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Fault Amps Default Read Only Captures and displays motor amps at the Min Max 0 0 Rated Amps x 2 time of the last fault Units 0 1 Amps Fault Bus Volts Default Read Only Captures and displays the DC bus Min Max 0 0 Max Bus Volts voltage of the drive at the time of the last Units 0 1 VDC fault Status 1 Fault Read Only Captures and displays Drive Status 1 bit pattern at the time of the last fault A V S Q S S Sv s SIS Y EEE MAS SE ASA SE SIS E la Lo SN SN 1 Condition True 0 0 0 01 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 AN ve p 1514 13 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ed Bit Status 2 Fault Read Only Captures and displays Drive Status 2 bit pattern a
121. Owners 3 52 Decel Time X 142 143 Ramp Rates 3 31 Accel Time X 140 141 Ramp Rates 3 31 Dig In Status 216 Diagnostics 3 43 Alarm Clear 261 Alarms 3 47 Dig Out Setpt 379 Digital Outputs 3 58 Alarm Config 1 259 Alarms 3 47 Dig Out Status 217 Diagnostics 3 43 Alarm X Fault 229 230 Diagnostics 3 45 Dig OutX Level 381 385 Digital Outputs 3 58 Alarm X Code 262 269 Alarms 3 47 989 B Analog Tn XHi 322 325 Analog Inputs 3 54 Pig Qu OtfTime 999 387 Digital Outputs E Analog In X Lo 323 326 Analog Inputs 3 54 Tm Analog In X Loes 324 327 Analog Inputs 3 54 Dig Ou QATima ae 986 Digital Outputs ES Analog Int Value 16 Metering 3 13 Digital InX Sel 361 366 Digital Inputs 3 57 Analog In2 Value 17 Metering 3 13 Digital OutX Sel 380 384 Digital Outputs 3 58 Analog OutX Hi 343 346 Analog Outputs 3 55 388 Analog OutX Lo 344 347 Analog Outputs 3 55 Direction Mask 279 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Analog OutX Sel 342 345 Analog Outputs 3 55 Direction Mode 190 Direction Config 3 38 Anlg In Config 320 Analog Inputs 3 53 Direction Owner 291 Masks 8 Owners 3 52 Anlg In Sqr Root 321 Analog Inputs 3 53 DPI Baud Rate 270 Comm Contro 3 49 Anlg Out Absolut 341 Analog Outputs 3 54 DPI Data Rate 270 Comm Contro 3 49 Anlg Out Config 340 Analog Outputs 3 54 DPI Fdbk Select 299 Comm Control 3 50 Anlg OutX Scale 354 355 Analog Outputs 3 56 DPI Port Sel 274 Comm Contro 3 50 Anlg Ou
122. PI Loop Running to Stop Jogging enabled Signal Loss is Enabled IHH HAD T H Digital Input II is Reflected BitO Bit 6 A Digital Input The Configured n n nel PI Configuration is Configured Digital Input i to PI Enable is Closed The drive must be running for the PI loop to be enabled The loop will be disabled when the drive is ramping to a stop unless Stop Mode is configured in PI Configuration jogging or the signal loss protection for the analog input s is sensing a loss of signal If a digital input has been configured to PI Enable two events are required to enable the loop the digital input must be closed AND bit 0 of the PI Control parameter must be 1 Application Notes C 15 Tf no digital input is configured to PI Enable then only the Bit 0 1 condition must be met If the bit is permanently set to a 1 then the loop will become enabled as soon as the drive goes into run PI Enabled PI Output Spd Cmd PI Enabled PI Pre load Value gt 0
123. Parameter View Vector Control Option Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 1 Advanced File Monitor Motor Control t Speed Command Dynamic Control A ess Group Parameters Metering Output Freq 001 Torque Current 004 MOP Reference 011 Commanded Speed 002 Flux Current 005 DC Bus Voltage 012 Ramped Speed 022 Output Voltage 006 DC Bus Memory 013 Speed Reference 023 Output Power 007 Analog Ini Value 016 Commanded Torque 024 Output Powr Fctr 008 Analog In2 Value 017 Speed Feedback 025 Elapsed MWh 009 Elapsed kWh 0143x Output Current 002 Elapsed Run Time 010 Drive Data Rated kW 026 Rated Amps 028 Rated Volts 027 Control SW Ver 029 Motor Data Motor Type 040 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor OL Factor 048 Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP Power 045 Motor Poles 049 Motor NP FLA 042 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Motor NP Hertz 043 Motor OL Hertz 047 Torq Attributes Motor Cntl Sel 053 Flux Current Ref 063 Torque Ref B Hi 432 Maximum Voltage 054 IXo Voltage Drop 064 Torque Ref B Lo 433 Maximum Freq 055 Autotune Torque 066 Torq Ref B Mult 434 Compensation 056 Inertia Autotune 067 Torque Setpoint 435 Flux Up Mode 057 Torque Ref A Sel 427 Torque Setpoint 2 4383x Flux Up Time 058 Torque Ref A Hi 428 Pos Torque Limit 436 SV Boost Filter 059 Torque Ref A Lo 429 Neg Torque Limit 437 Autotune 061 Torq Ref A Div 430 Control Status 440 IR Voltage Drop 062 Torque Ref B
124. Power Loss 3 37 PI Deriv Time 459 Process Pl 3 29 Inertia Autotune 67 Torq Attributes 3 18 PI Error Meter 137 Process Pl 3 29 IR Voltage Drop 62 Torq Attributes 3 17 PI Fdback Meter 136 Process PI 3 28 Ixo Voltage Drop 64 Torq Attributes 3 17 PI Feedback Hi 462 Process PI 3 29 Jog Mask 278 Masks amp Owners 3 51 PI Feedback Lo 463 Process PI 3 29 Jog Owner 290 Masks amp Owners 3 51 PI Feedback Sel 128 Process Pl 3 28 Jog Speed 100 Discrete Speeds 3 25 PI Integral Time 129 Process Pl 3 28 Jog Speed 1 100 Discrete Speeds 3 25 PI Lower Limit 131 Process Pl 3 28 Jog Speed 2 108 Discrete Speeds 3 25 PI Output Meter 138 Process Pl 3 29 Kf Speed Loop 447 Speed Regulator 3 30 PI Preload 133 Process Pl 3 28 Ki Speed Loop 445 Speed Regulator 3 29 PI Prop Gain 130 Process PI 3 28 Kp Speed Loop 446 Speed Regulator 3 30 PI Ref Meter 135 Process Pl 3 28 Language 201 Drive Memory 3 40 PI Reference Hi 460 Process Pl 3 29 Last Stop Source 215 Diagnostics 3 43 PI Reference Lo 461 Process Pl 3 29 Load Frm Uer Set 198 Drive Memory 3 40 Pl Reference Gel 126 Process Pl 3 27 Load Loss Level 187 Power Loss 3 38 PI Setpoint 127 Process Pl 3 27 Load Loss Time 188 Power Loss 3 38 PI Status 134 Process PI 3 28 Local Mask 285 Masks amp Owners 3 51 PI Upper Limit 132 Process Pl 3 28 Local Owner 297 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Pos Torque Limit 436 Torq Attributes 3 19 Logic Mask 276 Masks amp Owners 3 50 Power Loss Level 186 Power Loss 3 38 Man Ref
125. Preload 193 HIM Ref Config 3 39 Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss 3 37 Marker Pulse 421 Speed Feedback 3 21 Power Loss Time 185 Power Loss 3 37 Maximum Freq 55 Torq Attributes 3 16 Power Up Marker 242 Faults 3 46 Maximum Speed 82 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 Powerup Delay 167 Restart Modes 3 34 Maximum Voltage 54 Torq Attributes 3 15 Preset Speed X 101 107 Discrete Speeds 3 25 MicroPos Scale 611 Torq Proving 3 60 Pulse In Scale 422 Speed Feedback 3 21 Minimum Speed 81 Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 Pulse Input Ref 99 Speed Reference 3 25 MOP Frequency 11 Metering 3 13 PWM Frequency 151 Load Limits 3 31 MOP Mask 284 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Ramped Speed 22 Metering 3 13 MOP Owner 296 Masks A Owners 3 52 Rated Amps 28 Drive Data 3 14 MOP Rate 195 MOP Config 3 39 Rated kW 26 Drive Data 3 14 MOP Reference 11 Metering 3 13 Rated Volts 27 Drive Data 3 14 Motor Cntl Sel 53 Torq Attributes 3 15 Reference Mask 280 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Motor Fdbk Type 412 Speed Feedback 3 20 Reference Owner 292 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Motor NP FLA 42 Motor Data 3 14 Regen Power Limit 153 Load Limits 3 32 Motor NP Hertz 43 Motor Data 3 14 Reset Meters 200 Drive Memory 3 40 Motor NP Power 45 Motor Data 3 15 Reset To Defalts 197 Drive Memory 3 40 Motor NP RPM 44 Motor Data 3 14 Rev Speed Limit 454 Speed Regulator 3 23 Motor NP Volts 4 Motor Data 3 14 Run Boost 70 Volts per Hertz 3 19 Motor OL Count 220 Diagnostics 3 44 S Curve
126. Rev Jog Jog Fwd Jog Rev Rev Start amp j j i Stop CF Run Run Fwd Run Rev Jog Jog Fwd Jog Rev E Fwd Rev A El More than one physical input has been configured to the same input function Multiple configurations are not allowed for the following input functions Forward Reverse Hun Reverse Bus Regulation Mode B Speed Select 1 Jog Forward Acc2 Dec2 Speed Select 2 Jog Reverse Accel 2 Speed Select 3 Run Decel 2 Run Forward Stop Mode B The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in PWM frequency If Drive OL Mode is disabled and the load is not reduced an overload fault will eventually occur Alarm Drive OL Level 2 FluxAmpsRef Rang Ground Warn In Phase Loss IntDBRes OvrHeat IR Volts Range Ixo Vit Rang Load Loss MaxFreq Conflict Motor Thermistor Motor Type Cflct NP Hz Conflict Power Loss Precharge Active PTC Conflict Sleep Config Speed Ref Cflct Start At PowerUp No 15 13 9 009 a Type OO CO Troubleshooting 4 11 Description The calculated IGBT temperature requires a reduction in Current Limit If Drive OL Mode is disabled and the load is not reduced an overload fault will eventually occur The calculated or measured Flux Amps value is not within the expected range Verify motor data and rerun motor tests Ground current has excee
127. Signal 9730 9728 1 0 196 mm2 24 AWG indiv shielded 152 to 259 m Power 8790 2 0 750 mm 18AWG 800108501 combined 9773 97749 0 750 mm 18AWG indiv shielded pair 1 9730 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel power If 3 channel is required use 9728 2 8790 is 1 shielded pair 3 9892 is 3 individually shielded pairs 3 channel 0 33 mm 22 AWG 1 shielded pair 0 5 mm 20 AWG for power 4 9773 is 3 individually shielded pairs 2 channel power If 3 channel is required use 9774 If the wires are short and contained within a cabinet which has no sensitive circuits the use of shielded wire may not be necessary but is always recommended 1 16 Installation Wiring Table 1 F Recommended Control Wire for Digital UO or local code Wire Type s Unshielded Per US NEC or applicable national 300V Shielded The I O Control Cassette Multi conductor shielded cable such as Belden 8770 or equiv 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 conductor shielded Min Insulation Rating 60 C 140 F Figure 1 6 shows the I O Control Cassette and terminal block locations The cassette provides a mounting point for the various PowerFlex 700 T O options To remove the cassette follow the steps below Cassette removal will be similar for all frames 0 Frame drive shown Step e Description Disconnect the two cable connectors shown in Figure 1 6 O Loosen the two screw latches shown in Figure 1 6
128. Speed Loop 447 Totallnertia 450 Regulator Kp Speed Loop 446 Speed Desired BW 449 Speed Loop Meter 4513x Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 2 140 141 DecelTime 1 2 142 143 S Curve 146 Load Limits Current Lmt Sel 147 Drive OL Mode 150 Regen Power Limit 153 Current Lmt Val 148 Current Lmt Gain 149 PWM Frequency 151 Droop RPM FLA152 Current Rate Limit 154 Programming and Parameters 3 9 File Group Parameters Dynamic Stop Brake Stop Brk Mode 155 156 Bus Reg Ki 160 Bus Reg Kd 165 Control Modes DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Bus Reg Mode 161 162 Flux Braking 166 continued DC Brake Level 158 DB Resistor Type 163 DB While Stopped 1459 o DC Brake Time 159 Bus Reg Kp 164 mi Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Wake Time 181 Flying StartEn 169 Sleep Wake Mode 178 Sleep Level 182 L Flying StartGain 170 Sleep Wake Ref 179 Sleep Time 183 M Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Wake Level 180 PowerupDelay 167 Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Load Loss Level 1873 Gnd Warn Level 1773 Power Loss Time 185 Load Loss Time 1883x Power Loss Level 186 Shear Pin Time 1893x Utility Direction Config Direction Mode 190 gt HIM Ref Config Save HIM Ref 192 Man Ref Preload 193 MOP Config Save MOP Ref 194 MOP Rate 195 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Save To User Set 199 Voltage Class 202 ix Reset To Defalts 197 Reset Meters 200 Drive Checksum 203 Load Frm Usr Set 198 Language 201 Diagnostics Drive Stat
129. Time Y Yes Yes Reset Fault or Run Reverse was Chosen Yes i A No xc Did a Drive Was a Stop Issued 0 Fault Occur or Power Cycled Consult Factory No Yes Run Run Forward Which Required Input Stop or Enable Open amp Close Input Issue a Start Command HIM Network or TB No Drive Running _ Consult Factory Application Notes C 21 Start At PowerUp Standard Control Option When Start At Powerup in 2 wire control is configured the drive will start if the start permissive conditions are met within 10 seconds of drive power being applied An alarm will be annunciated from application of power until the drive actually starts indicating the powerup start attempt is in progress If the drive has not started within the 10 second interval the powerup start attempt will be terminated Vector Control Option A powerup delay time of up to 30 seconds can be programmed through Powerup Delay parameter 167 After the time expires the drive will start if all of the start permissive conditions are met Before that time restart is not possible Start At PowerUp T T Standard Control Option Vector Control Option Y Y 10 Second Limit Ves Powerup Delay No Expired Time Expired No Yes Y y Y All Start Pe
130. V or greater is recommended e Control and signal wires should be separated from power wires by at least 0 3 meters 1 foot Important I O terminals labeled or Common are not referenced to earth ground and are designed to greatly reduce common mode interference Grounding these terminals can cause signal noise ATTENTION Configuring an analog input for 0 20mA operation and driving it from a voltage source could cause component damage Verify proper configuration prior to applying input signals ATTENTION Hazard of personal injury or equipment damage exists when using bipolar input sources Noise and drift in sensitive input circuits can cause unpredictable changes in motor speed and direction Use speed command parameters to help reduce input source sensitivity Signal and Control Wire Types Table 1 E Recommended Signal Wire a Signal Type Belden Wire Type s Min Insulation Where Used or equivalent Description Rating Analog UO amp PTC 8760 9460 0 750 mm2 18AWG twisted pair 100 300V shield with drain 9 75 90 C Remote Pot 8770 0 750 mm 18AWG 3 cond shielded 167 194 F Encoder Pulse UO Combined 9730 1 0 196 mm 24 AWG individually 30 m 100 ft shielded Encoder Pulse I O Signal 9730 97281 0 196 mm 24 AWO indiv shielded 30 to 152 m Power 8790 0 750 mm 18AWG 100 to 500t fCombined 98926 0 330 mm or 0 500 mm 6 Encoder Pulse UO
131. a WE anda TEM 5 Run in2 wire See Table 4 C for info on 19 Local q E resolving this type of conflict 20 Acc2 amp Dec2 2 Vector Control Option Only 21 Accel 2 141 h 3 22 Decel 2 T 143 o 3 Spartrq Mode 23 MOP Inc 195 B uum Zen 0 0 1 Spd Reg 25 Excl Link p 0 1 0 Torque Reg 26 PI Enable 194 0 1 1 un Spa iq 27 Pl Hold 1 0 Jo ax Spd Trq v 1 0 SumSpd Trq 28 PI Reset 380 1 l1 lo Absolute 29 Pwr Loss Lvl 124 1 1 1 ZeroTrq 30 Precharge En 14 D 2 3 4 When Digital Inx Sel is set to option 2 3139 Eed Selt SH Clear Faults the Stop button cannot be 34 Jog 2 iia used to clear a fault condition 35 Pl us 12 Ka 5 Typical 3 Wire Inputs Only 3 wire 36 Torque zen functions are allowed Including 2 wire 37 Moo Pos 12 13 14 selections will cause a type 2 alarm 38 Fast Stop 12 14 8 Typical 2 Wire Inputs Requires that only 2 wire functions are chosen Including 3 wire selections will cause a type 2 alarm See Table 4 C for conflicts 7 Auto Manual Refer to Figure 1 10 on page 1 22 for details 8 Opening an Enable input will cause the motor to coast to stop ignoring any programmed Stop modes 9 Dig In ConflictB alarm will occur if a Start input is programmed without a Stop input 10 Refer to the Sleep Wake Mode Attention statement on page 3 36 11 A dedicated hardware enable input is available via a jumper selection Ref
132. able rs 14 13 12111 10 9 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values lo REL x Mx Ox ax Rx um mx 3 54 File INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Analog Inputs Analog Outputs Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Analog In 1 Hi Default 10 000 Volt Analog In 2 Hi 10 000 Volt Sets the highest input value to the analog Min Max 4 000 20 000mA input x scaling block 0 000 20 000mA BE Anlg In Config parameter 320 defines if Sanct on this input will be 10V or 4 20 mA 0 20 Units 0 001 mA mA with Vector firmware 3 xxx amp later 0 001 Volt Analog In 1 Lo Default 0 000 Volt Analog In 2 Lo 0 000 Volt Sets the lowest input value to the analog Min Max 4 000 20 000mA input x scaling block 0 000 20 000mA HE Anlg In Config parameter 320 defines if SE this input will be 10V or 4 20 mA 0 20 Units 0 001 mA mA with Vector firmware 3 xxx amp later 0 001 Volt If set below 4 mA Analog In x Loss should be Disabled Analog In 1 Loss Default 0 Disabled Analog In 2 Loss 0 Disabled Selects drive action when an analog Options 0 Disabled signal loss is detected Signal loss is 1 Fault defined as an analog signal less than 1V 2 Hold Input or 2mA The signal loss event ends and 3 Set Input Lo normal op
133. able Entry Plate limits the maximum ambient temperature to 40 degrees C 104 degrees F Power Wiring Access Panel Removal Frame Removal Procedure Replace when wiring is complete 0 1 28 6 Partof front cover see page 1 1 3 Open front cover and gently tap slide cover down and out 4 Loosen the 4 screws and remove 5 Remove front cover see page 1 1 gently tap slide panel up and out 1 8 Installation Wiring AC Input Phase Selection Frames 5 amp 6 Only ATTENTION To avoid a shock hazard ensure that all power to the A drive has been removed before performing the following Moving the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1 2 will allow single or three phase operation Important When selecting single phase operation input power must be applied to the R L1 and S L2 terminals only Selecting Verifying Fan Voltage Frames 5 amp 6 Only Important Read Attention statement above Frames 5 amp 6 utilize a transformer to match the input line voltage to the internal fan voltage If your line voltage is different than the voltage class specified on the drive nameplate it may be necessary to change transformer taps as shown below Common Bus DC input drives require user supplied 120 or 240V AC to power the cooling fans The power source is connected between 0 VAC and the terminal corresponding to your source voltage see Figure 1 4 Table A Fan VA ratings DC Input Only Frame Rating 12
134. act to the fixed 533V level only 10 for line loss detect any anomaly might trigger a false line loss detection Line loss therefore always uses the 6 minute average for DC bus voltage and detects line loss based on a fixed percentage of that memory In the same example the average would be 594V DC instead of 650V DC and the fixed percentage 27 for Coast to Stop and 18 for all others would allow identical operation regardless of line voltage Application Notes C 13 The PowerFlex 70 uses only these fixed percentages The PowerFlex 700 can selectively use the same percentages or the user can set a trigger point for line loss detect The adjustable trigger level is set using Power Loss Level see Power Loss Level on page 3 38 Figure C 4 Power Loss Mode Coast Nominal Bus Voltage 73 Motor Speed Power Loss Output Enable Figure C 5 Power Loss Mode Decel Bus Voltage Nominal 82 Motor Speed Power Loss lt Output Enable IT LJ ee Process Pl for Standard Control The internal PI function of the PowerFlex 700 provides closed loop process control with proportional and integral control action The function is designed for use in applications that require simple control of a process without external control devices The PI function allows the microprocessor of the drive to follow a
135. ady for setting IR Voltage Drop Flux 1 Static Tune Current Ref and Ixo Voltage Drop Valid 2 Rotate Tune only when parameter 53 is set to Sensrls 3 Calculate Vect SV Economize or FVC Vector Ready 0 Parameter returns to this setting following a Static Tune or Rotate Tune It also permits manually setting IR Voltage Drop Ixo Voltage Drop and Flux Current Ref Static Tune 1 A temporary command that initiates a non rotational motor stator resistance test for the best possible automatic setting of IR Voltage Drop in all valid modes and a non rotational motor leakage inductance test for the best possible automatic setting of Ixo Voltage Drop in FVC Vector mode A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start transition is required to operate the drive in normal mode Used when motor cannot be rotated Rotate Tune 2 A temporary command that initiates a Static Tune followed by a rotational test for the best possible automatic setting of Flux Current Ref In FVC Vector mode with encoder feedback a test for the best possible automatic setting of Slip RPM FLA is also run A start command is required following initiation of this setting The parameter returns to Ready 0 following the test at which time another start
136. age is 0 4V DC A 4 Supplemental Drive Information Communication Configurations Typical Programmable Controller Configurations Important If block transfers are programmed to continuously write information to the drive care must be taken to properly format the block transfer If attribute 10 is selected for the block transfer values will be written only to RAM and will not be saved by the drive This is the preferred attribute for continuous transfers If attribute 9 is selected each program scan will complete a write to the drives non volatile memory EEprom Since the EEprom has a fixed number of allowed writes continuous block transfers will quickly damage the EEprom Do Not assign attribute 9 to continuous block transfers Refer to the individual communications adapter User Manual for additional details Supplemental Drive Information A 5 Logic Command Status Words Figure A 1 Logic Command Word Logic Bits 15114 1312 11 10 9 87 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Command Description x Stop 10 Not Stop 1 Stop x Start M2 0 Not Start 1 Start X Jog 0 Not Jog 1 Jog X Clear 0 Not Clear Faults Faults 1 Clear Faults XX Direction 00 No Command 01 Forward Command 10 Reverse Command 11 Hold Present Direction D Local 0 No Local Control Control 1 Local Control D MOP 0 Not Increment Increment 1 Increment Xx Accel Rate 00 No Command 01 Use Accel Time 1 10 Use Accel Time 2
137. ameters 3 11 Advanced Fan Pump Parameter View U Standard Control Option Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 4 Adv Fan Pump File Group Parameters Monitor Metering Output Freq 001 Elapsed Run Time 010 Commanded Freq 002 DC Bus Voltage 012 Mt Output Current 003 Analog Int Value 016 Output Power 007 Analog In2 Value 017 Elapsed MWh 009 Motor Control Motor Data Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP Hertz 043 Motor NP Power 045 Motor NP FLA 042 Motor NP RPM 044 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 w Torq Attributes Torque Perf Mode 053 Maximum Freq 055 Maximum Voltage 054 Volts per Hertz Start Acc Boost 069 Break Voltage 071 em Run Boost 070 Break Frequency 072 Speed Spd Mode amp Speed Mode 080 Overspeed Limit 083 Skip Frequency 3 086 Command Limits Minimum Speed 081 Skip Frequency 1 084 Skip Freq Band 087 Maximum Speed 082 Skip Frequency 2 085 Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed RefALo 092 Speed Hei DH 094 References Speed Ref AHi 091 Speed Ref B Gel 093 Speed RefBLo 095 Discrete Preset Speed 2 4 102 104 Speeds Process PI Pl Configuration 124 Pl Integral Time 129 PI Status 134 PI Control 125 PI Prop Gain 130 PI Ref Meter 135 Pl Reference Sel 126 PI Lower Limit 131 PI Fdback Meter 136 PI Setpoint 127 PI Upper Limit 132 PI Error Meter 137 Pl Feedback Sel 128 PI Preload 133 Pl Output Meier 138 Dynamic Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 140 Decel Time 1 142 S Curve 146 Control Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 2 14
138. amount defined in Encoder PPR Encoder Speed Provides a monitoring point that reflects speed as seen from the feedback device Fdbk Filter Sel Selects the type of feedback filter desired Light uses a 35 49 radian feedback filter Heavy uses a 20 40 radian feedback filter Notch Filter Freq Sets the center frequency for an optional 2 pole notch filter Filter is applied to the torque command 0 disables this filter Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Min Max Units Motor NP Volts x 0 25 0 0 Motor NP Volts 0 1 VAC Motor NP Hz x 0 25 0 0 Maximum Freq 0 1 Hz 0 Quadrature Quadrature Quad Check Single Chan Single Check Go b i ch CH 1024 PPR 2 20000 PPR 1PPR Read Only 2147483647 1 Read Only 420 0 Hz 25200 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM None None Light 2 Heavy o 0 0 Hz 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz Related o SA IG o Eal IND o SA Co KO Eat Io Z Ico o SA I2 Programming and Parameters 3 21 Kal 3 S Parameter Name A Description S O Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values id 420 Notch Filter K Default 0 3 Hz 053 Sets the gain for the 2 pole notch fi
139. amp Description E it See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 040 Motor Type Default 0 Induction 053 O Set to match the type of motor Options 0 Induction connected 1 Synchr Reluc 1 i 1 1 Important Selecting option 1 or 2 2 Synchr BW also requires selection of Custom V Hz option 2 in parameter 53 041 Motor NP Volts Default Based on Drive Rating O Set to the motor nameplate rated volts Min Max 0 0 Rated Volts 2 Units 0 1 VAC 3 042 Motor NP FLA Default Based on Drive Rating 047 E O Get to the motor nameplate rated full load Min Max 0 0 Rated Amps x 2 048 SE amps Units 0 1 Amps 2 043 Motor NP Hertz Default Based on Drive Cat No O Set to the motor nameplate rated Min Max 5 0 400 0 Hz frequency Units 0 1 Hz 044 Motor NP RPM Default 1750 RPM O Set to the motor nameplate rated RPM 120 0 REM Min Max 60 2400 RPM 60 0 24000 0 RPM Units 1 RPM 1 0 RPM i MOTOR CONTROL a 3 o e Motor Data Torq Attributes 047 049 053 054 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Motor NP Power Default Set to the motor nameplate rated power Min Max Units Sener Mtr NP Pwr Units Default Selects the motor power units to be used Options Mtr NP Pwr Units Default Selects the motor power units to be used Convert HP converts all
140. and verify proper motor control torque proving The drive will also verify that the mechanical brake has control of the load prior to releasing drive control brake proving After the drive sets the brake motor movement is monitored to ensure the brakes ability to hold the load Lifting Application functionality includes e Torque Proving includes flux up and last torque measurement e Brake Proving includes mode to slowly lower load if brake slips fails e Float Capability e Micro Positioning e Fast Stop e Speed Deviation Fault Output Phase Loss Fault Encoder Loss Fault The Lifting Torque Proving feature is only available in Vector firmware versions 3 xxx and later It is intended to operate in the FVC Vector Control mode see Motor Cntl Sel parameter 053 with an encoder Motor movement is monitored through the encoder feedback which excludes the other feedback modes from being used cause personal injury and or equipment damage Loads must always be controlled by the drive or a mechanical brake Parameters 600 611 are designed for lifting torque proving applications It is the responsibility of the engineer and or end user to configure drive parameters test any lifting functionality and meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicable codes and standards ATTENTION Loss of control in suspended load applications can Lifting Torque Proving Manual Start Up It is possible to use the Assisted Start Up see
141. applications where torque control rather than mere torque production is key to the success of the process These include web handling demanding extruders and lifting applications such as hoists or material handling Vector Control can operate in one of two configurations 1 Encoderless Not to be confused with Sensorless Vector above Encoderless Vector based on Allen Bradley s patented Field Oriented Control technology means that a feedback device is not required Torque control can be achieved across a significant speed range without feedback 2 Closed Loop with Encoder force Vector Control with encoder feedback utilizes Allen Bradley s Force Technology This industry leading technology allows the drive to control torque over the entire speed range including zero speed For those applications that require smooth torque regulation at very low speeds or full torque at zero speed Closed Loop Vector Control is the answer Speed Regulators Any of the PowerFlex drives regardless of their motor control technology Volts Hz Sensorless Vector or Vector can be set up to regulate speed Speed regulation and torque regulation must be separated to understand drive operation The PowerFlex 70 and PowerFlex 700 with Standard Control can be programmed to regulate speed using the slip compensation feature Slip compensation reacts to load changes by adjusting the drive output frequency to maintain motor speed Torque production op
142. arameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Last Stop Source Default Read Only Displays the source that initiated the Options 0 Pwr Removed most recent stop sequence It will be 1 5 DPI Port 1 5 cleared set to 0 during the next start 6 Reserved sequence 7 Digital In 8 Fault 9 Not Enabled 10 Sleep 11 Jog 12 Autotune Wes 13 Precharge Wee Dig In Status Read Only Status of the digital inputs SO SS YY 1 Input Present X X X X X X X X X x 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Input Not Present pus 141812411109 8 7 6 5 4 3 21 0 x Reserved Bit Dig Out Status Read Only Status of the digital outputs SS SOS AVE ZVS 1 Output Energized X XIX X X XI XI X X X X X x 0 0O 0 Z S 0 Output De energized prits 14 13 12 11109 87654 321 0 x Reserved Bit 4 Vector Control Option Only Drive Temp Default Read Only Present operating temperature of the Min Max 0 0 100 0 drive power section Units 0 1 Drive OL Count Default Read Only Accumulated percentage of drive Min Max 0 0 100 0 overload Continuously operating the Units 0 1 drive over 100 of its rating will increase this value to 100 and cause a drive fault or foldback depending on the setting of Drive OL Mode 3 43 Related Ka lO L Ka lO IND Ka lo IG Ka o gt Ka lO lon Ka IO IO 361 thru 366 lO 3 44 File Group
143. as been powered on for more than 0 0000 214748 3647 Hr MEM the max value shown For relevance to Units 0 0001 Hr most recent power up see Fault x Time 0 1 Hr Fault 1 Code Default Read Only Fault 2 Code Fault 3 Code im ENS Fault 4 Code Fault 5 Code Fault 6 Code Fault 7 Code Fault 8 Code A code that represents the fault that tripped the drive The codes will appear in these parameters in the order they occur Fault 1 Code the most recent fault Related UTILITY Alarms 259 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Fault 1 Time Fault 2 Time Fault 3 Time Fault 4 Time Fault 5 Time Fault 6 Time Fault 7 Time Fault 8 Time The time between initial drive power up and the occurrence of the associated trip fault Can be compared to Power Up Marker for the time from the most recent power up Fault x Time Power Up Marker Time difference to the most recent power up A negative value indicates fault occurred before most recent power up A positive value indicates fault occurred after most recent power up Alarm Config 1 Enables disables alarm conditions that wil Values Default Read Only Min Max 0 0000 429496 7295 Hr 0 0000 214748 3647 Hr MEE Units 0 0001 Hr initiate an active drive alarm
144. atalog Number Explanation P 4 Who Should Use this Manual This manual is intended for qualified personnel You must be able to program and operate Adjustable Frequency AC Drive devices In addition you must have an understanding of the parameter settings and functions What Is Not in this Manual The PowerFlex 700 User Manual is designed to provide only basic start up information For detailed drive information please refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual The reference manual is included on the CD supplied with your drive or is also available online at http www rockwellautomation com literature Overview Reference Materials The following manuals are recommended for general drive information Title Publication Available Online at Wiring and Grounding Guidelines DRIVES INO01 for PWM AC Drives Preventive Maintenance of DRIVES TD001 Industrial Control and Drive System Equipment Safety Guidelines for the SGI 1 1 www rockwellautomation com Application Installation and literature Maintenance of Solid State Control A Global Reference Guide for 100 2 10 Reading Schematic Diagrams Guarding Against Electrostatic 8000 4 5 2 Damage For detailed PowerFlex 700 information Publication Available PowerFlex PFLEX RMOO on the CD supplied with the drive or Reference Manual www rockwellautomation com literature For Allen Bradley Drives Technical Support Title Online at Allen Bradle
145. ay Elements Display Description Direction Drive Status Alarm Auto Man Information Hz Commanded or Output Frequency Main Menu Diagnostics Parameter Device Select Programming Monitoring Troubleshooting The top line of the HIM display can be configured with DPI Fdbk Select parameter 299 Vector firmware 3 xxx and later ALT Functions To use an ALT function press the ALT key release it then press the programming key associated with one of the following functions Table B A ALT Key Functions ALT Key and then Performs this function S M A R T Displays the S M A R T screen View Allows the selection of how parameters will be viewed or detailed information about a parameter or component O Lang Displays the language selection screen e Auto Man Switches between Auto and Manual Modes Remove Allows HIM removal without causing a fault if the ALT e HIM is not the last controlling device and does not have Manual control of the drive Exp Allows value to be entered as an exponent O Not available on PowerFlex 700 amp Param Allows entry of a parameter number for viewing editing HIM Overview B 3 Menu Structure Figure B 1 HIM Menu Structure User Display r oO ogo ooa Y Y Faults Fault Info Diagnostics Status Info gt Drive Status1 Ven Fault Queue Device Items Drive Status 2 Clear Faults e Device Version g
146. can produce is 3 7 HP at 44 6 Hz co y e T T kd ia HP Motor Drive Output 342V 460V gt i Actual Line Voltage Drive Input 480V gt H 528V Application Notes C 25 Notes C 26 Application Notes Notes Numerics 32 Bit Parameters 3 2 A AC Input Circuit Breakers A 7 Ground 1 4 Line Fuses A 7 AC Supply Source 1 2 Unbalanced 1 3 Ungrounded 1 3 Accel Mask 3 51 Accel Owner 3 52 Accel Time x 3 31 Access Panel Removal 1 7 Agency Certification A 1 Alarm A Fault Types 4 1 Alarm 1 Fault 3 45 Alarm 2 Fault 3 45 Alarm Clear 3 47 Alarm Config 1 3 47 Alarm Descriptions 4 10 Alarm x Code 3 47 Alarms Analog In Loss 4 10 Bipolar Contlict 4 10 Brake Slipped 4 10 Decel Inhibt 4 10 Dig In Conflict 4 10 Drive OL Level 4 10 FluxAmpsRef Rang 4 11 Ground Warn 4 11 In Phase Loss 4 11 IntDBRes OvrHeat 4 11 IR Volts Range 4 11 Ixo Vit Rang 4 11 Load Loss 4 11 MaxFreq Conflict 4 11 Motor Thermistor 4 11 Motor Type Cflct 4 11 NP Hz Conflict 4 11 Power Loss 4 11 Precharge Active 4 11 PTC Conflict 4 11 Sleep Config 4 11 Speed Ref Cflct 4 11 Start At PowerUp 4 11 TB Man Ref Cflct 4 12 Index Torq Prove Cflct 4 12 UnderVoltage 4 12 VHz Neg Slope 4 12 Waking 4 12 Alarms Group 3 47 Alarms Clearing 4 9 ALT Key Functions B 2 ALT Key Functions B 2 Ambient Temperature 1 2 Analog In Loss Alarm 4 10 Analog In Loss Fault 4 4 Analo
147. circuit protection Specifications for the recommended fuse or circuit breaker to provide protection against short circuits are provided in Appendix A Power Wiring ATTENTION National Codes and standards NEC VDE BSI etc and local codes outline provisions for safely installing electrical equipment Installation must comply with specifications regarding wire types conductor sizes branch circuit protection and disconnect devices Failure to do so may result in personal injury and or equipment damage Cable Types Acceptable for 200 600 Volt Installations A variety of cable types are acceptable for drive installations For many installations unshielded cable is adequate provided it can be separated from sensitive circuits As an approximate guide allow a spacing of 0 3 meters 1 foot for every 10 meters 32 8 feet of length In all cases long parallel runs must be avoided Do not use cable with an insulation thickness less than or equal to 15 mils 0 4mm 0 015 in Use Copper wire only Wire gauge requirements and recommendations are based on 75 degrees C Do not reduce wire gauge when using higher temperature wire Unshielded THHN THWN or similar wire is acceptable for drive installation in dry environments provided adequate free air space and or conduit fill rates limits are provided Do not use THHN or similarly coated wire in wet areas Any wire chosen must have a minimum insulation thickness of 15 Mils and should not have
148. d Enable disable or modify the password User Dspy Lines Select the display parameter scale and text for the User Display The User Display is two lines of user defined data that appears when the HIM is not being used for programming User Dspy Time Set the wait time for the User Display or enable disable it User Dspy Video Select Reverse or Normal video for the Frequency and User Display lines Reset User Dep Return all the options for the User Display to factory default values HIM Overview B 5 The PowerFlex 700 drive is initially set to Basic Parameter View To view all parameters set parameter 196 Param Access Lvl to option 1 Advanced Parameter 196 is not affected by the Reset to Defaults function Viewing and Editing Parameters LCD HIM Step Example Displays 1 Inthe Main Menu press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll to Parameter 2 Press Enter FGP File appears on the top line and the first three files appear below it 3 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the files 4 Press Enter to select a file The groups in the file are displayed under it 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to select a group and then a parameter The parameter value screen will appear 6 Press Enter to edit the parameter 7 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to change the value If desired press Sel to move from digit to digit letter to letter or bit to bit The digit or bit t
149. d C 10 Motor Overload Fault 4 6 Motor Poles 3 15 Motor Thermistor Alarm 4 11 Motor Thermistor Fault 4 6 Motor Type 3 14 Motor Type Cflct Alarm 4 11 Mounting Clearances 1 2 Orientation 1 2 Mounting Dimensions A 15 MOVs 1 13 Mtr NP Pwr Units 3 15 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 3 19 N Neg Torque Limit 3 19 NET LED 4 2 Non Resettable 4 1 Notch Filter Freq 3 20 Notch Filter K 3 21 NP Hz Conflict Alarm 4 11 NVS I O Checksum Fault 4 6 NVS I O Failure Fault 4 6 O Opening the Cover 1 1 Operating Modes 1 22 Operating Temperature 1 2 Operator Interface B 5 Output Contactor Start Stop 1 12 Output Current 3 12 Output Devices Cable Terminators A 7 Common Mode Cores A 7 Contactors 1 12 A 7 Output Freq 3 12 Output PhaseLoss Fault 4 7 Output Power 3 12 Output Powr Fetr 3 12 Output Voltage 3 12 Overspeed C 11 Overspeed Limit 3 22 OverSpeed Limit Fault 4 7 OverVoltage Fault 4 7 P Param Access Lvl 3 39 Parameter Changing Editing B 5 Descriptions 3 1 File Group Parameter Organization 3 3 Linear List 3 3 Viewing B 5 Parameter Chksum Fault 4 7 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 61 by Number 3 64 Parameter Linking B 6 Parameter View Advanced Standard Control 3 6 Fan Pump 3 11 Vector Control 3 8 Basic Standard Control 3 4 Fan Pump 3 10 Vector Control 3 5 Parameters Accel Mask 3 51 Accel Owner 3 52 Accel Time x 3 31 Alarm 1 Fault 3 45 Alarm 2 Fault 3 45 Alarm Cl
150. d Mode must be set to 1 Slip Comp Slip RPM O FLA Sets the amount of compensation to drive output at motor FLA Ifthe value of parameter 061 Autotune 3 Calculate changes made to this parameter will not be accepted Value may be changed by Autotune when Encoder is selected in Feedback Select parameter 080 Slip Comp Gain Sets the response time of slip compensation Slip RPM Meter Displays the present amount of adjustment being applied as slip compensation Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Based on Motor NP RPM 0 0 1200 0 RPM 0 1 RPM 40 0 1 0 100 0 0 1 Read Only 300 0 RPM 0 1 RPM Related kak Ico O I Io CO 29 IN BE IO ko Ic Z IO o Ico IND a a x 079 117 o lO Bata g IGO IO de lesk IND Go INO e ez CH mre IND N aii fo IGO IND IO a lt je Oo a TT HI o 7 No 124 125 12 o 127 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Important Parameters in the Process PI Group are used to enable and tune the PI Loop In order to allow the PI Loop to control drive operation program the following Standard Control Option Parameter 080 Speed Mode must be set to 2 Process PI and parameter 125 bit O must be set to 1
151. ded the level set in Gnd Warn Level The DC bus ripple has exceeded the level in Phase Loss Level The drive has temporarily disabled the DB regulator because the resistor temperature has exceeded a predetermined value The drive auto tuning default is Calculate and the value calculated for IR Drop Volts is not in the range of acceptable values This alarm should clear when all motor nameplate data is properly entered Motor leakage inductance is out of range Output torque current is below Load Loss Level for a time period greater than Load Loss time The sum of Maximum Speed and Overspeed Limit exceeds Maximum Freq Raise Maximum Freq or lower Maximum Speed and or Overspeed Limit so that the sum is less than or equal to Maximum Freq The value at the thermistor terminals has been exceeded Motor Type has been set to Synchr Reluc or Synchr PM and one or more of the following exist e Torque Perf Mode Sensrls Vect SV Economize or Fan Pmp V Hz e Flux Up Time is greater than 0 0 Secs e Speed Mode is set to Slip Comp e Autotune Static Tune or Rotate Tune Fan pump mode is selected in Torq Perf Mode and the ratio of Motor NP Hertz to Maximum Freq is greater than 26 Drive has sensed a power line loss Drive is in the initial DC bus precharge state PTC is enabled for Analog In 1 which is configured as a 0 20 mA current source in Anlg In
152. dex 10 Trim Hi 3 26 Trim In Select 3 26 Trim Lo 3 26 Trim Out Select 3 26 Voltage Class 3 40 Wake Level 3 37 Wake Time 3 37 Zero SpdFloatTime 3 60 Params Defaulted Fault 4 7 PE Ground 1 4 Phase Short Fault 4 7 Phase to Grnd Fault 4 7 PI BW Filter 3 29 Configuration 3 27 Control 3 27 Deriv Time 3 29 Error Meter 3 29 Fdback Meter 3 28 Feedback Hi 3 29 Feedback Lo 3 29 Feedback Sel 3 28 Integral Time 3 28 Lower Limit 3 28 Output Meter 3 29 Preload 3 28 Prop Gain 3 28 Ref Meter 3 28 Reference Hi 3 29 Reference Lo 3 29 Reference Sel 3 27 Setpoint 3 27 Status 3 28 Upper Limit 3 28 Port 1 5 DPI Loss Fault 4 7 PORT LED 4 2 Ports DPI Type B 1 Pos Torque Limit 3 19 Potentiometer Wiring 1 20 Power Cables Wiring 1 5 Power Conditioning Input 1 3 Power Loss Alarm 4 11 Power Loss Fault 4 8 Power Loss Group 3 37 Power Loss Level 3 38 Power Loss Mode 3 37 Power Loss Ride Through C 12 Power Loss Time 3 37 Power Terminal Block 1 10 Power Unit Fault 4 8 0 09 99 909 909 909 099 9 9 ns las 9 099 9 Power Wiring Access Panel 1 7 General 1 7 PowerFlex 700 Reference Manual P 1 Powering Up the Drive 2 1 Powerup Delay 3 34 PowerUp Marker 3 46 Precautions General P 3 Precharge 1 24 Precharge Active Alarm 4 11 Preferences Setting B 4 Preset Speed x 3 25 Process Pl Standard Control C 13 Process PI Group 3 27 Programmable Controller Configurations A 4 Progra
153. e I O 1 16 Catalog Number Explanation P 4 CE Conformity 1 25 Requirements 1 26 Checklist Start Up 2 1 Circuit Breakers Input 1 5 Clear Fault Owner 3 52 Clearing Alarms 4 9 Clearing Faults 4 4 Cntl Bd Overtemp Fault 4 4 Comm Control Group 3 49 Commanded Freq 3 12 Commanded Speed 3 12 Commanded Torque 3 13 Common Bus 1 24 Common Mode Capacitors 1 13 Common Mode Interference 1 15 Common Symptoms and Corrective Action 4 13 Communication File 3 49 Communications Logic Command Word A 5 Logic Status Word A 6 Programmable Controller Configurations A 4 Compensation 3 16 Conduit 1 7 Contactors Bypass 1 13 Input 1 12 Output 1 12 A 7 Control Options 3 3 Control Status 3 19 Control SW Ver 3 14 Control Wire 1 16 Control Auto Manual 1 23 Conventions Manual P 2 Copycat B 4 Cover Opening 1 1 Cross Reference Parameter by Name 3 61 by Number 3 64 Current Lmt Gain 3 31 Current Lmt Sel 3 31 Current Lmt Val 3 31 Current Rate Limit 3 32 D Data In Ax 3 52 Data Out Ax 3 53 Data Saving B 4 Datalinks Group 3 52 DB Resistance Fault 4 4 DB Resistor Type 3 34 DB While Stopped 3 32 DC Brake Level 3 33 DC Brake Time 3 33 DC Brk Levl Sel 3 32 DC Bus Memory 3 13 DC Bus Voltage 3 13 DC Input 1 24 Decel Inhibit Fault 4 5 Decel Inhibt Alarm 4 10 Decel Mask 3 51 Decel Owner 3 52 Decel Time x 3 31 Defaults Resetting to 3 40 B 4 Diagnostic Data Viewing B 4 Diagn
154. e is negative The Wake timer is counting toward a value that will start the drive 1 See page 4 1 for a description of alarm types Table 4 D Alarm Cross Reference No UI Alarm Nol Alarm No Alarm 1 Precharge Active 13 In Phase Loss 25 IR Volts Range 2 UnderVoltage 14 Load Loss 26 FluxAmpsRef Rang 3 Power Loss 15 Ground Warn 27 Speed Ref Cflct 4 Start At PowerUp 17 Dig In ConflictA 28 Ixo Vit Rang 5 Analog in Loss 18 Dig In ConflictB 29 Sleep Config 6 IntDBRes OvrHeat 19 Dig In ConflictC 30 TB Man Ref Cflct 8 Drive OL Level 1 20 Bipolar Conflict 31 PTC Conflict 9 Drive OL Level 2 21 Motor Type Cflct 32 Brake Slipped 10 Decel Inhibt 22 NP Hz Conflict 49 Torq Prove Cflct 11 Waking 23 MaxFreq Conflict 12 Motor Thermistor 24 VHz Neg Slope 1 Alarm numbers not listed are reserved for future use Troubleshooting 4 13 Common Symptoms and Corrective Actions Drive does not Start from Start or Run Inputs wired to the terminal block Cause s Indication Corrective Action Drive is Faulted Flashing red Clear fault status light e Press Stop e Cycle power e Set Fault Clear to 1 See page 3 46 e Clear Faults on the HIM Diagnostic menu Incorrect input wiring See pages 1 20 amp None Wire inputs correctly and or install 1 21 for wiring examples jumper e 2wire control requires Run Run Forward Run Reverse or Jog input e 3 wire control requires Start and Sto
155. e values assume the drive is operating above Motor OL Hertz and that Motor OL Factor is set to 1 00 Operation below 100 current causes the temperature calculation to account for motor cooling Motor Overload Curve 100000 Cold Hot 10000 1000 Trip Time Sec 100 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 Full Load Amps Motor OL Hertz defines the frequency where motor overload capacity derate should begin The motor overload capacity is reduced when operating below Motor OL Hertz For all settings of Motor OL Hertz other than zero the overload capacity is reduced to 70 at an output frequency of zero Changing Overload Hz 120 OL Hz 10 OL Hz 25 OL Hz 50 o e eo o E o Continuous Rating o e a o o 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 of Base Speed Application Notes C 11 Motor NP FLA is multiplied by Motor OL Factor to select the rated current for the motor thermal overload This can be used to raise or lower the level of current that will cause the motor thermal overload to trip The effective overload factor is a combination of Motor OL Hertz and Motor OL Factor Changing Overload Factor 140 OL 1 20 120 OL 1 00 100 OL 0 80 bd a 80 2 60 3 40 20 0 0 10 20 3
156. eady Ready Factory Low Voltage High Voltage Ready Ready User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 Ready Ready User Set 1 User Set 2 User Set 3 Ready Ready MWh Elapsed Time Not Selected Not Selected English Francais Espa ol Italiano Deutsch Portugu s Nederlands Based on Drive Cat No Low Voltage High Voltage Reserved 1 Convert Lo V Reserved 1 Convert Hi V Vector firmware v3 001 amp up Related IS LE LA A Ne o SA iS o SA IOn o IO IND o lO de o lO Ico g ES me o Ico IND gt Co LA SA Co CO IO Si Co Programming and Parameters 3 41 cs a eo 3 d Parameter Name amp Description O Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 5 203 Drive Checksum Default Read Only 5 Provides a checksum value that indicates Min Max 0 65535 whether or not a change in drive Units 1 programming has occurred a 209 Drive Status 1 Read Only 210 Present operating condition of the drive 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved Bits 2 Bits 1 15 14 13 12 Description 11 10 9 Description 0
157. ear 3 47 Alarm Config 1 3 47 Alarm x Code 3 47 Index 7 Analog In x Hi 3 54 Analog In x Lo 3 54 Analog Inx Value 3 13 Analog Out Scale 3 56 Analog Out Hi 3 55 Analog Out Lo 3 55 Analog Ou Sel 3 55 Analog Out2 Hi 3 55 Analog Out2 Lo 3 55 Analog Out2 Sel 3 55 Anlg In Config 3 53 Anlg In Loss 3 54 Anlg In Sqr Root 3 53 Anlg Out Absolut 3 54 Anlg Out Config 3 54 Anlg Out Setpt 3 56 Auto Rstrt Delay 3 35 Auto Rstrt Tries 3 35 Autotune 3 17 Autotune Torque 3 18 Break Frequency 3 20 Break Voltage 3 20 Brk Alarm Travel 3 60 Brk Release Time 3 60 Brk Set Time 3 60 BrkSlip Count 3 60 Bus Reg Kd 3 34 Bus Reg Ki 3 33 Bus Reg Kp 3 34 Bus Reg Mode A 3 33 Bus Reg Mode B 3 33 Clear Fault Owner 3 52 Commanded Freq 3 12 Commanded Speed 3 12 Commanded Torque 3 13 Compensation 3 16 Control Status 3 19 Control SW Ver 3 14 Current Lmt Gain 3 31 Current Lmt Sel 3 31 Current Lmt Val 3 31 Current Rate Limit 3 32 Data In Ax 3 52 Data Out Ax 3 53 DB Resistor Type 3 34 DB While Stopped 3 32 DC Brake Level 3 33 DC Brake Time 3 33 DC Brk Levl Sel 3 32 DC Bus Memory 3 13 DC Bus Voltage 3 13 Decel Mask 3 51 Decel Owner 3 52 Decel Time x 3 31 Index 8 Dig In Status 3 43 Dig Out Setpt 3 58 Dig Out Status 3 43 Dig Outx Level 3 58 Dig Outx OffTime 3 59 Dig Outx OnTime 3 59 Digital Inx Sel 3 57 Digital Outx Sel 3 58 Direction Mask 3 51 Direction Mode 3 38 D
158. ective Action Incorrect reference source has None 3 Check Speed Ref Source for the source of been programmed the speed reference See page 3 42 4 Reprogram Speed Ref A Sel for correct source See page 3 24 Incorrect Reference source is None 5 Check Drive Status 1 page 3 41 bits 12 being selected via remote device or and 13 for unexpected source selections digital inputs 6 Check Dig In Status page 3 43 to see if inputs are selecting an alternate source 7 Reprogram digital inputs to correct Speed Sel x option See page 3 57 Motor and or drive will not accelerate to commanded speed Cause s Indication Corrective Action Acceleration time is excessive None Reprogram Accel Time x See page 3 31 Excess load or short acceleration None Check Drive Status 2 bit 10 to see if the drive times force the drive into current is in Current Limit See page 3 41 limit slowing or stopping Remove excess load or reprogram Accel Time acceleration x See page 3 31 Speed command source or value is None Check for the proper Speed Command using not as expected Steps 1 through 7 above Programming is preventing the None Check Maximum Speed See page 3 22 and drive output from exceeding limiting Maximum Freq See page 3 16 to assure values that speed is not limited by programming Motor operation is unstable Corrective Action 1 Correctly enter motor nameplate data 2 Perform
159. ed 2 Output Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated 3 Torque Amps 200 Rated 0 Amps 200 Rated 4 Flux Amps 0 Amps 0 Amps 200 Rated 5 Output Power 0 kW 0 kW 200 Rated 6 Output Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 120 Rated Input Volts 7 DC Bus Volts 0 Volts 0 Volts 200 Rated Input Volts 8 Pl Reference 100 0 100 9 PI Feedback 100 0 100 10 PI Error 100 0 100 11 Pl Output 100 0 100 12 Motor OL 0 0 100 13 Drive OL 0 0 100 14 CommandedTra 800 Rated 0 800 Rated 15 MtrTrqCurRef 20096 Rated 0 200 Rated 16 Speed Ref Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed 17 Speed Fdbk Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed 18 Pulse In Ref 25200 0 RPM 0 Hz RPM Maximum Speed 19 Torque Est 800 0 800 2023 Scale Block1 4 1 24 Param Cntl 0 Vector Control Option Onl 1 Analog Out Hi Analog Out2 Hi Sets the analog output value when the source value is at maximum Analog Out Lo Analog Out2 Lo Sets the analog output value when the source value is at minimum y Vector firmware 3 001 amp later Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 56 Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 20 000 mA 10 000 Volts 4 000 20 000mA 0 000 20 000mA HEM 410 000V 0 001 mA 0 001 Volt 0 000 mA 0 000 Volts 4 000 20 000mA 0 000
160. ed Ref 17 Speed Fdbk 18 Pulse In Ref 2 19 Reserved 20 23 Scale Block Am Determines which adapters can control the drive If the bit for an adapter is set to 0 the adapter will have no control functions except for stop of SOS SIS S SE SOS S 9 1 Control Permitted Xixixix xixixix xi xi1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Control Masked pus 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit 4 Factory Default Bit Values Start Mask Controls which adapters can issue start commands See Logic Mask Related Programming and Parameters 3 51 mod o S S Parameter Name Description 3 it See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 278 Jog Mask See Logic Mask 288 O Controls which adapters can issue jog thru commands 297 279 Direction Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can issue thru forward reverse direction commands 297 280 Reference Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can select an thru alternate reference Speed Ref A B Sel Pu or Preset Speed 1 7 281 Accel Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can select thru Accel Time 1 2 297 282 Decel Mask See Logic Mask 288 Controls which adapters can select thru Decel Time 1 2 297 283 Fault Clr Mask See Logic Mask 288 Cont
161. eed command returns to the PLC Auto Manual Notes 1 Manual control is exclusive If a HIM or Terminal Block takes manual control no other device can take manual control until the controlling device releases manual control 2 If a HIM has manual control and power is removed from the drive the drive will return to Auto mode when power is reapplied 1 24 Installation Wiring Lifting Torque Proving For Lifting Torque Proving details refer to page C 2 Common Bus Precharge Notes The following notes must be read and understood Also refer to pages 1 8 through 1 11 for additional common bus information Important Application Notes 1 If drives without internal precharge are used Frames 5 amp 6 only then a precharge capability must be provided in the system to guard against possible damage and b disconnect switches Must Not be used between the input of the drive and a common DC bus without the use of an external precharge device 2 If drives with internal precharge Frames 0 6 are used with a disconnect switch to the common bus then a an auxiliary contact on the disconnect must be connected to a digital input of the drive The corresponding input parameter 361 366 must be set to option 30 Precharge Enable This provides the proper precharge interlock guarding against possible damage to the drive when connected to a common DC bus b the drive must have firmware version 2 002 or above Standard a
162. ent PVC jacket Class amp Il ray rated 600V 90 C e Three bare copper conductors with XLPE insulation and Division amp 11 194 F RHH RHW 2 impervious corrugated continuously welded aluminum Anixter 7V 7xxxx 3G or armor equivalent e Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket overall e Three copper grounds on 10 AWG and smaller EMC Compliance Refer to EMC Instructions on page 1 25 for details Cable Trays and Conduit If cable trays or large conduits are to be used refer to the guidelines presented in the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INOOI ATTENTION To avoid a possible shock hazard caused by induced voltages unused wires in the conduit must be grounded at both ends For the same reason if a drive sharing a conduit is being serviced or installed all drives using this conduit should be disabled This will help minimize the possible shock hazard from cross coupled motor leads Motor Cable Lengths Typically motor lead lengths less than 91 meters 300 feet are acceptable However if your application dictates longer lengths refer to the Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INO01 Cable Entry Plate Removal If additional wiring access is needed the Cable Entry Plate on 0 3 Frame drives can be removed Simply loosen the screws securing the plate to the chassis The slotted mounting holes assure easy removal Important Removing the C
163. er to page 1 19 for further information 12 Vector firmware 3 001 and later 13 Only available when Torque Proving function is selected 14 Refer to Option Definitions on page 3 56 3 58 File INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Digital Outputs Programming and Parameters 37 eo 380 384 388 381 385 389 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Dig Out Setpt Sets the digital output value from a communication device Example Set Data In B1 to 379 The first three bits of this value will determine the setting of Digital Outx Sel which should be set to 30 Param Cnitl SIS 1 Output Energized X x x x x x x x x x x x x 0 0 0 plis 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 DRE py energized Bit Digital Out Sel Default 1 Faull Digital Out2 Sel 4 Run Digital Out3 Sel 4 Run Selects the drive status that will energize Options 1 Fault 1 a CRx output relay 2 Alarm 1 3 Ready 1 Any relay programmed as Fault or 7 Bun gt Alarm will energize pick up when 5 Forward Run power is applied to drive and 6 Reverse Run deenergize drop out when a fault 7 Au Restart or alarm exists Relays selected for 8 Powerup Run other functions will energize only 9 M Speed when that condition exists and will 10 At Freq deenergize whe
164. erCurrent Fault 4 8 System Grounding 1 4 7 TB Man Ref Cflct Alarm 4 12 TB Man Ref Hi 3 25 TB Man Ref Lo 3 25 TB Man Ref Sel 3 25 Terminal Block Encoder 1 16 1 19 Power 1 10 Standard Control I O 1 17 Standard I O 1 16 Vector Control I O 1 18 Wire Size Encoder 1 16 1 0 1 16 Power 1 9 Testpoint 1 Sel 3 45 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 16 Testpoint x Data 3 45 Torq Attributes Group 3 15 Torq Prove Cflct Alarm 4 12 Torq Ref A Div 3 18 TorqLim SlewRate 3 60 TorqProve Cnfg 3 59 TorqProve Setup 3 59 TorqPrv Spd Band Fault 4 8 Torque Current 3 12 Torque Perf Mode 3 15 Torque Proving C 2 Torque Proving Start Up 2 3 Torque Ref B Mult 3 2 3 18 Torque Ref x Hi 3 18 Torque Ref x Lo 3 18 Torque Ref x Sel 3 18 Torque Reference Source 1 22 Torque Setpoint 3 19 Torque Setpoint2 3 19 Total Inertia 3 30 Trim Setpoint 3 26 Trim Hi 3 26 Trim In Select 3 26 Trim Lo 3 26 Trim Out Select 3 26 Trnsistr OvrTemp Fault 4 8 Troubleshooting 4 1 U Unbalanced Ungrounded Supply 1 3 UnderVoltage Alarm 4 12 Fault 4 9 Ungrounded Distribution Systems 1 13 Unshielded Power Cables 1 5 User Configurable Alarm 4 1 User Sets B 4 UserSet Chksum Fault 4 9 Utility File 3 38 V Vector Control I O Terminal Block 1 18 VHz Neg Slope Alarm 4 12 Viewing and Changing Parameters B 5 Voltage Class 3 40 Voltage Tolerance C 24 Volts per Hertz Group 3 19 W Wake Level 3 37 Wake Time
165. erates independently This feature produces speed regulation of about 0 5 of base speed over a specified speed range 40 1 for V Hz and 80 1 for Sensorless Vector These two drives do not have the capability to extend the speed range or tighten the speed regulation below 0 5 because they do not have connections for a feedback device The PowerFlex 700 with the Vector Control option can offer better speed regulation by adding speed feedback Using a speed feedback device encoder tightens speed regulation to 0 001 of base speed and extends the speed range to zero speed C 10 Application Notes Motor Overload For single motor applications the drive can be programmed to protect the motor from overload conditions An electronic thermal overload 12T function emulates a thermal overload relay This operation is based on three parameters Motor NP FLA Motor OL Factor and Motor OL Hertz parameters 042 048 and 047 respectively Motor NP FLA is multiplied by Motor OL Factor to allow the user to define the continuous level of current allowed by the motor thermal overload Motor OL Hertz is used to allow the user to adjust the frequency below which the motor overload is derated The motor can operate up to 102 of FLA continuously If the drive had just been activated it will run at 150 of FLA for 180 seconds If the motor had been operating at 100 for over 30 minutes the drive will run at 150 of FLA for 60 seconds Thes
166. eration resumes when the 4 Set Input Hi input signal level is greater than or equal 5 Goto Preset1 to 1 5V or 3mA 6 Hold OutFreq Anlg Out Config Selects the mode for the analog outputs G xix x TYT 1 Current X X X X X X X X X X X cres 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 oo Bit Vector Control Option Only Factory Default Bit Values Anlg Out Absolut Selects whether the signed value or absolute value of a parameter is used before being scaled to drive the analog output D G SES x xixix xixixix xixixix xix 1 1 ege rs 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Vector Control Option Only Factory Default Bit Values Fei I gt IND I gt KE O NO File INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Analog Outputs 343 346 344 347 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Analog Out Sel Analog Selects the source of the value that drives the analog output Programming and Parameters Values Default Options Out2 Sel 0 Output Freq See Table Analog Out Lo Value Options Param 341 Signed Param 341 Absolute Analog Out1 Hi Value 0 Output Freq Maximum Speed 0 Hz Maximum Speed 1 Command Freq Maximum Speed 0 Hz Maximum Speed 1 Command Spd Maximum Speed 0 Hz RPM Maximum Spe
167. ers to factory defaults based on Voltage Class e Options 2 amp 3 will reset parameters to factory defaults and set Voltage Class to low or high voltage settings Important Frames 5 4 6 the internal fan voltage may have to be changed when using Option 2 or 3 See Selecting Nerifying Fan Voltage on page 1 8 Load Frm Usr Set Loads a previously saved set of parameter values from a selected user set location in drive nonvolatile memory to active drive memory Save To User Set Saves the parameter values in active drive memory to a user set in drive nonvolatile memory Reset Meters Resets selected meters to zero Language Selects the display language when using an LCD HIM This parameter is not functional with an LED HIM Options 6 8 and 9 are Reserved Voltage Class Configures the drive current rating and associates it with the selected voltage i e 400 or 480V Normally used when downloading parameter sets Options 2 amp 3 indicate status only Selecting Option 4 or 5 will covert configure the drive Min Max amp Default values will be changed for parameters 41 47 54 55 62 63 69 70 72 82 148 158 Important Frames 5 amp 6 the internal fan voltage may have to be changed when using Option 4 or 5 See page 1 8 Values Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options Default Options e R
168. ert mode is only available with Vector firmware 3 xxx and later C 20 Application Notes Figure C 9 Sleep Wake Mode Have these conditions been met 1 Sleep Wake Ref must be set to the analog input that will control Start Stop functions 2 Sleep Wake Mode must 1 Direct Enable or 2 Invert Enable 3 Sleep Level must be less than Wake Level in Direct mode or greater than Wake Level in Invert mode 4 Speed Ref x Sel must be set to a speed reference source that will control the drive If Sleep Wake Ref Speed Ref x Sel the same analog signal will control start stop and speed reference 5 Atleast one of the following must be programmed for Digital Inx Sel Not Stop Enable Start Run Run Forward Run Reverse Yes Is Required Input Closed Stop Enable Run Yes Which Mode is Selected Direct Invert or Direct Invert No Meet all Conditions il p Y Decrease Analog Input Signal and wait for a time period greater than or equal to Wake Time No and for time period greater than Is Analog Signal Less than or equal to Wake Level or equal to Wake Time Is Analog Signal Greater than or equal to Wake Level and for time period greater than or equal to Wake Time No Signal and wait for a time Increase Analog Input period greater than or equal to Wake
169. eters you can set the following functions S Start Mode and Stop Mode M Minimum and Maximum Speed A Accel Time 1 and Decel Time 1 R Reference Source T Thermal Motor Overload To run a S M A R T start routine LOTO Example LCD Displays F gt Stopped Auto b Stop Mode A 3 Press Esc to exit the S M A R T start ceo a peda Running an Assisted Start Up Important This start up routine requires an LCD HIM The Assisted start up routine asks simple yes or no questions and prompts you to input required information Access Assisted Start Up by selecting Start Up from the Main Menu To perform an Assisted Start Up LOTO Example LCD Displays F gt Stopped Auto Main Menu Memory Storage Start Up Preferences Chapter 3 Programming and Parameters Chapter 3 provides a complete listing and description of the PowerFlex 700 parameters The parameters can be programmed viewed edited using an LCD HIM Human Interface Module As an alternative programming can also be performed using DriveExplorer or DriveExecutive software and a personal computer Refer to Appendix B for a brief description of the LCD HIM For information on See page About Parameters 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 Monitor File 3 12 Motor Control File 3 14 Speed Command File 3 21 Dynamic Control File 3 31 Utility File 3 38 Communication File 3
170. g Digital Out1 Sel parameter 380 will be ignored when TorqProve Cnfg is set to Enable Figure C 3 Typical Torque Proving Configuration Brake Set Normally Open Brake Set EI 115V AC Brake Contactor 24V configuration shown see page 1 21 for other examples Lifting Torque Proving Application Programming The PowerFlex 700 lifting application is mainly influenced by parameters 600 through 611 in the Torque Proving group of the Application file Figure C 3 and the paragraphs that follow describe programming Figure C 3 Torque Proving Flow Diagram Operator Run Run Commands Command Command Released y 1 ee SA OA 2 A E 0 J J Brk Release Time ZeroSpdFloatTime Brk Set Time Parameter 604 Parameter 605 Parameter 607 Drive Torque Brake Float Brake Brake Actions Prove Initiated Released Initiated Set Slip Test Al times between Drive Actions are programmable and can be made very small i e Brake Release Time can be 0 1 seconds Application Notes Torque Proving When the drive receives a start command to begin a lifting operation the following actions occur 1 The drive first performs a transistor diagnostic test to check for phase to phase and phase to ground shorts A failure status from either of these tests will result in a drive fault and the brake relay will
171. g In x Hi 3 54 Analog In x Lo 3 54 Analog Inputs Group 3 53 Analog Inx Value 3 13 Analog Out Scale 3 56 Analog Out Hi 3 55 Analog Out Lo 3 55 Analog Ou Sel 3 55 Analog Out2 Lo 3 55 Analog Out2 Sel 3 55 Analog Outputs Group 3 54 Anlg Cal Chksum Fault 4 4 Anlg In Config 3 53 Anlg In Loss 3 54 Anlg In Sqr Root 3 53 Anlg Out Absolut 3 54 Anlg Out Config 3 54 Anlg Out Setpt 3 56 Applications File 3 59 Armored Cable 1 6 Assisted Start Up 2 3 Auto Mode 1 22 Auto Rstrt Delay 3 35 Auto Rstrt Tries 3 35 Auto Rstrt Tries Fault 4 4 Auto Manual Control 1 23 Modes 1 22 Auto Reset Start 4 1 Autotune 3 17 AutoTune Aborted Fault 4 4 Autotune Torque 3 18 Auxiliary Input Fault 4 4 Index 2 Before Applying Power 2 1 Bipolar Conflict Alarm 4 10 Bipolar Inputs 1 15 Bottom Plate Removal 1 7 Bottom View Dimensions A 19 Brake Dynamic 3 33 Brake Slipped Alarm 4 10 Break Frequency 3 20 Break Voltage 3 20 Brk Alarm Travel 3 60 Brk Release Time 3 60 Brk Set Time 3 60 BrkSlip Count 3 60 Bus Capacitors Discharging P 3 Bus Reg Kd 3 34 Bus Reg Ki 3 33 Bus Reg Kp 3 34 Bus Reg Mode A 3 33 Bus Reg Mode B 3 33 Bypass Contactors 1 13 C Cable Entry Plate Removal 1 7 SHLD Terminal 1 4 Cable Length Motor 1 7 Cable Trays 1 7 Cables Power Armored 1 6 Insulation 1 5 Separation 1 5 Shielded 1 5 1 6 Type 1 5 Unshielded 1 5 Capacitors Bus Discharging P 3 Cassett
172. ge gt Frequency Trim i 4 o vu due to Speed l 8 i Control Mode Overspeed i W SCH Limit I 2 Break ht l 3 Voltage TT i 1 I 5 1 y d O Start l Boost A l i Run IEN j Boost p I gt 0 Minimum Break Motor NP Hz Maximum Output Maximum Speed Frequency Speed Frequency Frequency Frequency Limit Note 1 The lower limit on this range can be 0 depending on the value of Speed Adder Power Loss Ride Through When AC input power is lost energy is being supplied to the motor from the DC bus capacitors The energy from the capacitors is not being replaced via the AC line thus the DC bus voltage will fall rapidly The drive must detect this fall and react according to the way it is programmed Two parameters display DC bus voltage e DC Bus Voltage displays the instantaneous value e DC Bus Memory displays a 6 minute running average of the voltage All drive reactions to power loss are based on DC Bus Memory This averages low and high line conditions and sets the drive to react to the average rather than assumed values For example a 480V installation would have a 480V AC line and produce a nominal 648V DC bus If the drive were to react to a fixed voltage for line loss detect i e 533V DC then normal operation would occur for nominal line installations However if a lower nominal line voltage of 440V AC was used then nominal DC bus voltage would be only 594V DC If the drive were to re
173. ge Fault 4 6 J Jog Mask 3 51 Jog Owner 3 51 Jog Speed 3 25 Index 6 K Kf Speed Loop 3 30 Ki Speed Loop 3 29 Kp Speed Loop 3 30 L Language 3 40 Last Stop Source 3 43 LCD HIM Menus B 4 LEDs 4 2 Lifting Torque Proving C 2 Lifting Torque Proving Start Up 2 3 Linear List 3 3 Linking Parameters B 6 Load Frm Usr Set 3 2 3 40 Load Limits Group 3 31 Load Loss Alarm 4 11 Load Loss Fault 4 6 Load Loss Level 3 38 Load Loss Time 3 38 Local Mask 3 51 Local Owner 3 52 Logic Command Word A 5 Logic Mask 3 50 Logic Status Word A 6 Low Voltage Directive 1 25 M Man Ref Preload 3 39 Manual Conventions P 2 Manual Mode 1 22 Manual Auto Control 1 23 Marker Pulse 3 21 Masks 8 Owners Group 3 50 MaxFreq Conflict Alarm 4 11 Maximum Freq 3 16 Maximum Speed 3 22 Maximum Voltage 3 15 Menu Structure HIM B 4 Metering Group 3 12 MicroPos Scale 3 60 Minimum Clearances 1 2 Minimum Speed 3 22 C 7 MOD LED 4 2 Modes Auto Manual 1 22 Monitor File 3 12 MOP Config Group 3 39 MOP Frequency 3 13 MOP Mask 3 51 MOP Owner 3 52 MOP Rate 3 39 MOP Reference 3 13 Motor Cable Lengths 1 7 Motor Cntl Sel 3 15 Motor Control File 3 14 Motor Control Technology C 8 Motor Data Group 3 14 Motor Fdbk Type 3 20 Motor NP FLA 3 14 Motor NP Hertz 3 14 Motor NP Power 3 15 Motor NP RPM 3 14 Motor NP Volts 3 14 Motor OL Count 3 44 Motor OL Factor 3 15 Motor OL Hertz 3 15 Motor Overloa
174. han 195 MOP Rate 427 431 Torque Ref X Sel 196 Param Access Lvl 428 432 Torque Ref X Hi 197 Reset To Defalts 429 433 Torque Ref X Lo 198 Load Frm Usr Set 430 Torq Ref A Div 199 Save To User Set 434 Torque Ref B Mult 200 Reset Meters 435 Torque Setpoint 201 Language 436 Pos Torque Limit 202 Voltage Class 437 Neg Torque Limit 234 236 Testpoint X Sel 438 Torque Setpoint2 238 Fault Config 1 440 Control Status 240 Fault Clear 445 Ki Speed Loop 241 Fault Clear Mode 446 Kp Speed Loop 259 Alarm Config 1 447 Kf Speed Loop 261 Alarm Clear 449 Speed Desired BW 270 DPI Baud Rate 450 Total Inertia DPI Data Rate 454 Rev Speed Limit 274 DPI Port Sel 459 PI Deriv Time 276 Logic Mask 460 Pl Reference Hi 277 Start Mask 461 Pl Reference Lo 278 Jog Mask 462 PI Feedback Hi 279 Direction Mask 463 PI Feedback Lo 280 Reference Mask 476 494 ScaleX In Value 281 Accel Mask 477 495 ScaleX In Hi 282 Decel Mask 478 496 ScaleX In Lo 283 Fault Clr Mask 479 497 ScaleX Out Hi 284 MOP Mask 480 498 ScaleX Out Lo 285 Local Mask 600 TorqProve Cnfg 298 DPI Ref Select 601 TorqProve Setup 299 DPI Fdbk Select 602 Spd Dev Band 300 307 Data In XX 603 SpdBand Integrat 310 317 Data Out XX 604 Brk Release Time 320 Anlg In Config 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime 321 Anlg In Sqr Root 606 Float Tolerance 322 325 Analog In X Hi 607 Brk Set Time 323 326 Analog In X Lo 608 TorqLim SlewRate 324 327 Analog In X Loss 609 BrkSlip Coun 340 Anlg Out Config 610 Brk Alarm Travel 34
175. hat you can change will be highlighted 8 Press Enter to save the value If you want to cancel a change press Esc 9 Press the Up Arrow or Down Arrow to scroll through the parameters in the group or press Esc to return to the group list Numeric Keypad Shortcut Key s O D O Bar File Monitor Motor Control Speed Reference F P Group Motor Data Torq Attributes Volts per Hertz FG g Parameter Maximum Voltage Compensation FGP Maximum Freq UU Hz 25 400 00 Par 55 FGP Par 55 90 00 Hz 25 400 00 If using a HIM with a numeric keypad press the ALT key and the key to access the parameter by typing its number Linking Parameters Vector Control Option Only Most parameter values are entered directly by the user However certain parameters can be linked so the value of one parameter becomes the value of another For Example the value of an analog input can be linked to Accel Time 2 Rather than entering an acceleration time directly via HIM the link allows the value to change by varying the analog signal This can provide additional flexibility for advanced applications e Destination parameter receiver of information Most parameters can be a source of data for a link except parameter values that contain an integer representing an ENUM text choice These are not allowed since the integer is
176. hen micropositioning has been selected Motor must come to a stop before this setting will take effect Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 2 0 Hz 60 0 RPM 0 1 15 0 Hz 3 0 450 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM 60 mSec 1 200 mSec 1 mSec 0 10 Secs 0 00 10 00 Secs 0 01 Secs 5 0 Secs 0 1 500 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 0 2 Hz 6 0 RPM 0 1 5 0 Hz 3 0 150 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM 0 10 Secs 0 00 10 00 Secs 0 01 Secs 10 0 Secs 0 5 300 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 250 0 65535 4 1 0 Revs 0 0 1000 0 Revs 0 1 Revs 10 0 0 1 100 0 0 1 E Related CO lo IND Programming and Parameters 3 61 Parameter Cross Reference by Name Parameter Name Number Group Page Parameter Name_ Number Group Page Accel Mask 281 Masks amp Owners 3 51 Decel Owner 294 Masks amp Owners 3 52 Accel Owner 293 Masks amp
177. his fault will occur To disable this fault set the Logic Mask bit for the adapter to 0 1 Check DPI device event queue and corresponding fault information for the device 4 8 Troubleshooting Fault 22 Power Loss 3 0 Power Unit 70 Pulse In Loss 92 Pwr Brd Chksum1 104 Pwr Brd Chksum2 105 Replaced MCB PB 107 Shear Pin 63 IO Software Fault 88 Software Fault 89 SW OverCurrent 36 TorgPrv Spd Band 20 Trnsistr OvrTemp 9 D Description DC bus voltage remained below 85 of nominal for longer than Power Loss Time Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 46 One or more of the output transistors were operating in the active region instead of desaturation This can be caused by excessive transistor current or insufficient base drive voltage Z Channel is selected as a pulse input and no signal is present The checksum read from the EEPROM does not match the checksum calculated from the EEPROM data The checksum read from the board does not match the checksum calculated Main Control Board was replaced and parameters were not programmed Programmed Current Lmt Val has been exceeded Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 on page 3 46 Microprocessor handshake error Microprocessor handshake error Drive output current has exceeded the 1ms current rating This rating is greater than the 3 second current rating and less than the hardware overcurrent fau
178. ial encoder One of the 2 encoder channel signals is missing Both encoder channels changed state within one clock cycle 1 Uncouple load from motor 2 Repeat Autotune 1 Check Wiring 2 Replace encoder Check for externally induced noise 2 Replace encoder No fault displayed Used as a marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the fault clear function was performed No fault displayed Used as a marker in the Fault Queue indicating that the clear queue function was performed The value for flux amps determined by the Autotune procedure exceeds the programmed Motor NP FLA A current path to earth ground greater than 25 of drive rating Hardware enable is disabled jumpered high but logic pin is still low Gate array load error Dual port failure Heatsink temperature exceeds 100 of Drive Temp 1 Reprogram Motor NP FLA with the correct motor nameplate value 2 Repeat Autotune Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition 1 Check jumper 2 Replace Main Control Board 1 Cycle power 2 Replace Main Control Board 1 Cycle power 2 Replace Main Control Board 1 Verify that maximum ambient temperature has not been exceeded 2 Check fan 3 Check for excess load 4 6 Troubleshooting Fault 2 e HW OverCurrent 12 Incompat MCB PB 106 UD Comm Loss 121 1 0 Failure 122 UO Mismatch 120 Standard
179. ibutes 3 18 Torque Ref X Hi 428 432 Torq Attributes 3 18 Torque Ref X Lo 429 433 Torq Attributes 3 18 Torque Ref X Sel 427 431 Torq Attributes 3 18 Torque Setpoint 435 Torq Attributes 3 19 Torque Setpoint2 438 Torq Attributes 3 19 3 64 Programming and Parameters Parameter Cross Reference by Number Number Parameter Name Group Page Number Parameter Name Group Page 1 Output Freq Metering 3 12 80 Feedback Select Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 2 Commanded Freq Metering 3 12 Speed Mode Spd Mode amp Limits Commanded Speed Metering 81 Minimum Speed Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 3 Output Current Metering 3 12 82 Maximum Speed Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 4 Torque Current Metering 3 12 83 Overspeed Limi Spd Mode amp Limits 3 22 5 Flux Current Metering 3 12 84 86 Skip Frequency X Spd Mode amp Limits 3 23 6 Output Voltage Metering 3 12 87 Skip Freq Band Spd Mode amp Limits 3 23 7 Output Power Metering 3 12 88 Speed Torque Mod Spd Mode amp Limits 3 23 8 Output Powr Fctr Metering 3 12 90 93 Speed Ref X Se Speed Reference 3 24 9 Ela
180. ignored during installation ATTENTION The following information is merely a guide for proper Opening the Cover Frames 0 4 Locate the slot in the upper left corner Slide the locking tab up and swing the cover open Special hinges allow cover to move away from drive and lay on top of adjacent drive if present See page 1 7 for frame 4 access panel removal E Frame 5 Slide the locking tab up loosen the right hand cover screw and remove See page 1 7 for access panel removal Frame 6 Loosen 2 screws at bottom of drive cover Carefully slide bottom cover down amp out Loosen the 2 screws at top of cover and remove 1 2 Installation Wiring Mounting Considerations Operating Temperatures PowerFlex 700 drives are designed to operate at 0 to 40 C ambient To operate the drive in installations between 41 and 50 C see below Table 1 A Acceptable Surrounding Air Temperature amp Required Actions Required Action Drive Catalog IP 20 NEMA Type 1 1 IP 20 NEMA Type Open IP 00 NEMA Type Open Number No Action Required Remove Top Label Remove Top Label amp Vent Plate All Except 20BC072 40 C 50 C NA 20BC072 40 C 45 C 50 C IP20 NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosures are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a on against contact with enclosed equipment These enclosures offer no Removing the adhesive top label from the drive changes the NEMA enclosure rating from Ty
181. inal Block The voltage must be zero Table 1 D Jumper Removal U Frames Jumper Component Jumper Location No 0 1 PEA Common Mode Capacitors Remove the I O Cassette page 1 16 Jumpers PEB MOV s located on the Power Board Figure 1 5 e 2 4 PEA Common Mode Capacitors Jumpers are located above the Power Terminal PEB MOUS Block see Figure 1 5 o 5 Wire Common Mode Capacitors Remove the I O Cassette as described on e page 1 16 The green yellow jumper is located on the back of chassis see Figure 1 5 for loca tion Disconnect insulate and secure the wire to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components MOV s Note location of the two green yellow jumper Input Filter Capacitors wires next to the Power Terminal Block Figure 1 5 Disconnect insulate and secure the wires to guard against unintentional contact with chassis or components 6 Wire Common Mode Capacitors Remove the wire guard from the Power Terminal MOV s Block Disconnect the three green yellow wires Input Filter Capacitors from the two PE terminals shown in Figure 1 4 Insulate secure the wires to guard against unin tentional contact with chassis or components 1 Important Do Not remove jumpers if the distribution system is grounded 1 14 Installation Wiring Figure 1 5 Typical Jumper Locations see Table 1 D for description HIST 00000000 zi
182. input level that will stop the drive Sleep Time Defines the amount of time at or below Sleep Level before a Stop is issued Gnd Warn Level Sets the level at which a ground warning fault will occur Configure with Alarm Config 1 Power Loss Mode Sets the reaction to a loss of input power Power loss is recognized when e DC bus voltage is lt 73 of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to Coast e DC bus voltage is lt 82 of DC Bus Memory and Power Loss Mode is set to Decel Power Loss Time Sets the time that the drive will remain in power loss mode before a fault is issued Programming and Parameters Values Default Options Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Options Default Units Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 2 Analog In 2 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 6 000 mA 6 000 Volts Sleep Level 20 000 mA 10 000 Volts 0 001 mA 0 001 Volts 1 0 Secs 0 0 Secs 0 0 30 0 Secs 0 0 1000 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 5 000 mA 5 000 Volts 4 000 mA Wake Level 0 000 Volts Wake Level 0 001 mA 0 001 Volts 1 0 Secs 0 0 Secs 0 0 30 0 Secs 0 0 1000 0 Secs 0 1 Secs 3 0 Amps 1 0 5 0 Amps 0 1 Amps Coast Coast Decel Continue Coast Input Decel Input Aon za CH O 0 5 Secs 0 0 60 0 Secs 0 1 Secs
183. ion Drive 200 208V 240V 380 400 480V 600V 690V AC Input Overvoltage Trip 247VAC 285VAC 475VAC 570VAC 690VAC AC Input Undervoltage Trip 120VAC 138VAC 233VAC 280VAC 345VAC Bus Overvoltage Trip 405VDC 405VDC 810VDC 810VDC 1013VDC Bus Undervoltage Shutoff Fault 153VDC 153VDC 305VDC 305VDC 381VDC Nominal Bus Voltage All Drives Heat Sink Thermistor 281VDC 324VDC 540VDC 648VDC 810VDC Monitored by microprocessor overtemp trip Drive Overcurrent Trip Software Overcurrent Trip Hardware Overcurrent Trip 200 of rated current typical 220 300 of rated current dependent on drive rating Line transients up to 6000 volts peak per IEEE C62 41 1991 A 2 Category Protection continued Environment Electrical Control Supplemental Drive Information Specification Control Logic Noise Immunity Showering arc transients up to 1500V peak Power Ride Thru 15 milliseconds at full load Logic Control Ride Thru 0 5 seconds minimum 2 seconds typical Ground Fault Trip Phase to ground on drive output Short Circuit Trip Phase to phase on drive output Altitude 1000 m 3300 ft max without derating Maximum Surrounding Air Temperature without Derating IP20 NEMA Type 1 0 to 50 degrees C 32 to 122 degrees F typical See pages A 8 through A 13 for exceptions Storage Temperature all const
184. ion 8000 4 5 2 Guarding Against Electrostatic Damage or any other applicable ESD protection handbook ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed drive can result in component damage or a reduction in product life Wiring or application errors such as undersizing the motor incorrect or inadequate AC supply or excessive ambient temperatures may result in malfunction of the system ATTENTION Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation start up and subsequent maintenance of the system Failure to comply may result in personal injury and or equipment damage ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before performing any work on the drive Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Terminal Block refer to Chapter for location The voltage must be zero ATTENTION Risk of injury or equipment damage exists DPI or SCANport host products must not be directly connected together via 1202 cables Unpredictable behavior can result if two or more devices are connected in this manner ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradle
185. irection Owner 3 52 DPI Baud Rate 3 49 DPI Data Rate 3 49 DPI Fdbk Select 3 50 DPI Port Sel 3 50 DPI Port Value 3 50 DPI Ref Select 3 50 Drive Alarm 1 3 41 Drive Alarm 2 3 41 3 42 Drive Checksum 3 41 Drive Logic Rslt 3 49 Drive OL Count 3 43 Drive OL Mode 3 31 Drive Ramp Rslt 3 49 Drive Ref Rslt 3 49 Drive Status 1 3 41 Drive Temp 3 43 Droop RPM FLA 3 32 Elapsed kWh 3 13 Elapsed MWH 3 12 Elapsed Run Time 3 12 Enc Position Fdbk 3 20 Encoder PPR 3 20 Encoder Speed 3 20 Encoder Z Chan 3 21 Fault 1 Time 3 47 Fault Amps 3 44 Fault Bus Volts 3 44 Fault Clear 3 46 Fault Clear Mode 3 46 Fault Clr Mask 3 51 Fault Config x 3 46 Fault Frequency 3 44 Fault Speed 3 44 Fault x Code 3 46 Fdbk Filter Sel 3 20 Feedback Select 3 22 Float Tolerance 3 60 Flux Braking 3 34 Flux Current 3 12 Flux Current Ref 3 17 Flux Up Mode 3 16 Flux Up Time 3 16 Flying Start En 3 35 Flying StartGain 3 35 Gnd Warn Level 3 37 Inertia Autotune 3 18 IR Voltage Drop 3 17 Ixo Voltage Drop 3 17 Jog Mask 3 51 Jog Owner 3 51 Jog Speed 3 25 Kf Speed Loop 3 30 Ki Speed Loop 3 29 Kp Speed Loop 3 30 Language 3 40 Last Stop Source 3 43 Load Frm Usr Set 3 2 3 40 Load Loss Level 3 38 Load Loss Time 3 38 Local Mask 3 51 Local Owner 3 52 Logic Mask 3 50 Man Ref Preload 3 39 Marker Pulse 3 21 Maximum Freq 3 16 Maximum Speed 3 22 Maximum Voltage 3 15 MicroPos Scale 3 60 Minimum S
186. is set to 0 when a manual adjustment is made to this parameter Programming and Parameters Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Defau Min M Units Values It ax It ax It ax It ax t t ax Read Only 100 0 200 0 0 1 Read Only 100 0 Hz 100 0 800 0 BENI 0 1 Hz 0 1 0 0 Radians 0 0 240 0 Radians 0 1 Radians 0 00 Secs 0 00 100 00 Secs 0 01 Secs 100 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 4100 0 0 1 0 0 100 0 0 1 7 0 0 0 4000 0 0 1 3 29 Related IND gt L s ee loc bag IND LE hri I g Co c r i29 Eal I gt o1 IO 3 30 9 E o Cd e ES gt Gil o IER CC fay mi g Ld e o Group No Programming and Parameters 446 449 450 451 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Kp Speed Loop Controls the proportional error gain of the speed regulator The drive automatically adjusts Kp Speed Loop when a non zero value is entered for Speed Desired BW or an auto tune is performed Typically manual adjustment of this parameter is needed only if system inertia cannot be determined through an autotune Speed
187. ive Skip Skip Frequency 0 Hz 400 Hz Skip Frequency 1 a 60 Hz Max Frequency 0 Hz Application Notes C 19 Sleep Wake Mode This function stops sleep and starts wake the drive based on separately configurable analog input levels rather than discrete start and stop signals When enabled in Direct mode the drive will start wake when an analog signal is greater than or equal to the user specified Wake Level and stop the drive when an analog signal is less than or equal to the user specified Sleep Level When Sleep Wake is enabled for Invert mode the drive will start wake when an analog signal is less than or equal to the user specified Wake Level and stop the drive when an analog signal is greater than or equal to the user specified Sleep Level Definitions e Wake A start command generated when the analog input value remains above Wake Level or below when Invert mode is active for a time greater than Wake Time e Sleep A Stop command generated when the analog input value remains below Sleep Level or above when Invert mode is active for a time greater than Sleep Time e Speed Reference The active speed command to the drive as selected by drive logic and Speed Ref x Sel e Start Command A command generated by pressing the Start button on the HIM closing a digital input programmed for Start Run Run Forward or Run Reverse Refer to Figure C 9 1 Inv
188. ive OL Mode Load Limits 3 31 70 Run Boost Volts per Hertz 3 19 151 PWM Frequency Load Limits 3 31 71 Break Voltage Volts per Hertz 3 20 152 Droop RPM FLA Load Limits 3 32 72 Break Frequency Volts per Hertz _ 3 20 153 Regen Power Limit Load Limits 3 32 79 Speed Units Spd Mode amp Limits 3 21 154 Current Rate Limit Load Limits 3 32 Programming and Parameters 3 65 Number Parameter Name Group Page Number Parameter Name Group Page 155 156 Stop Mode X Stop Brake Modes 3 32 234 236 Testpoint X Sel Diagnostics 3 45 Stop BRK Mode X Stop Brake Modes 235 237 Testpoint X Data Diagnostics 3 45 157 DC Brk Lvl Sel Stop Brake Modes 3 32 238 Fault Config 1 Faults 3 46 158 DC Brake Level Stop Brake Modes 3 33 240 Fault Clear Faults 3 46 159 DC Brake Time Stop Brake Modes 3 33 241 Fault Clear Mode Faults 3 46 160 Bus Reg Ki Stop Brake Modes 3 33 242 Power Up Marker Faults 3 46 161 162 Bus Reg Mode X Stop Brake Modes 3 33 243 Fault 1 Code Faults 3 46 163 DB Resistor Type Stop Brake Modes 3 34 244 Fault 1 Time Faults 3 47 164 B
189. k Parameter 141 Accel Time 2 Link 017 Analog In1 Value Table B B Linkable Parameters HIM Overview B 7 Number Parameter Number Parameter Number Parameter 54 Maximum Voltage 159 DC Brake Time 462 PI Feedback Hi 56 Compensation 160 Bus Reg Ki 463 PI Feedback Lo 57 Flux Up Mode 164 Bus Reg Kp 476 494 ScaleX In Value 58 Flux Up Time 165 Bus Reg Kd 471 495 ScaleX In Hi 59 SV Boost Filter 170 Flying StartGain 478 496 ScaleX In Lo 62 IR Voltage Drop 175 Auto Rstrt Delay 479 497 ScaleX Out Hi 63 Flux Current Ref 180 Wake Level 480 498 ScaleX Out Lo 69 Start Acc Boost 181 Wake Time 602 Spd Dev Band 70 Run Boost 182 Sleep Level 603 SpdBand Integrat 71 Break Voltage 183 Sleep Time 604 Brk Release Time 72 Break Frequency 185 Power Loss Time 605 ZeroSpdFloatTime 84 Skip Frequency 1 186 Power Loss Level 606 Float Tolerance 85 Skip Frequency 2 321 Anlg In Sqr Root 607 Brk Set Time 86 Skip Frequency 3 322 Analog In1 Hi 608 TorqLim SlewRate 87 Skip Freq Band 323 Analog Int Lo 609 BrkSlip Count 91 Speed Ref A Hi 324 Analog Int Loss 610 Brk Alarm Travel 92 Speed Ref A Lo 325 Analog In2 Hi 611 MicroPos Scale 94 Speed Ref B Hi 326 Analog In2 Lo ER Speed Ref B Lo 327 Analog In2 Loss 97 TB Man Ref Hi 343 Analog Out Hi 98 TB Man Ref Lo 344 Analog Out
190. ke Level Defines the DC brake current level injected into the motor when DC Brake is selected as a stop mode The DC braking voltage used in this function is created by a PWM algorithm and may not generate the smooth holding force needed for some applications Refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual A used Programming and Parameters Values Default Min Max Units Rated Amps 0 Rated Amps x 1 5 Equation yields approximate maximum value 0 1 Amps ATTENTION If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be ATTENTION This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors Motors may be demagnetized during braking DC Brake Time Sets the amount of time DC brake current is injected into the motor Bus Reg Ki Sets the responsiveness of the bus regulator Bus Reg Mode A Bus Reg Mode B Sets the method and sequence of the DC bus regulator voltage Choices are dynamic brake frequency adjust or both Sequence is determined by programming or digital input to the terminal block Dynamic Brake Setup If a dynamic brake resistor is connected to the drive both of these parameters must be set to either option 2 3 or 4 Refer to the Attention statement on page P 4 for important information on bus regulation Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default
191. ks 3 amp 4 only Scale In Lo Scale2 In Lo Scale3 In Lo Scale4 In Lo Scales the lower value of ScaleX In Value 1 Blocks 3 amp 4 only Scale1 Out Hi IE Scale2 Out Hi Wane Scale3 Out Hi Scale4 Out Hi Scales the upper value of ScaleX Out Value 1 Blocks 3 amp 4 only Scale1 Out Lo Scale2 Out Lo Scale3 Out Lo Scale4 Out Lo Scales the lower value of ScaleX Out Value 1 Blocks 3 amp 4 only Scale1 Out Value Scale2 Out Value Scale3 Out Value Scale4 Out Value Value of the signal being sent out of the Universal Scale block Typically this value is used as the source of information and will be linked to another parameter 1 Blocks 3 amp 4 only Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units 0 0 32000 0 32767 0 v2 xxx 32767 000 1 0 1 0 001 Iri 0 0 32000 0 32767 0 v2 xxx 32767 000 TO 0 1 0 001 MEM 0 0 32000 0 32767 0 v2 xxx 32767 000 TO 0 1 0 001 MEM 0 0 32000 0 32767 0 v2 xxx 32767 000 gram 1 0 1 0 001 ER 0 0 32000 0 32767 0 v2 xxx 32767 000 TO 0 1 0 001 Read Only 32000 0 32767 0 v2 xxx 32767 000 TO 0 1 0 001 Related File COMMUNICATION Comm Control Group
192. l Auto Speed Sources The drive speed command can be obtained from a number of different sources The source is determined by drive programming and the condition of the Speed Select digital inputs Auto Manual digital inputs or reference select bits of a command word The default source for a command reference all speed select inputs open or not programmed is the selection programmed in Speed Ref A Sel If any of the speed select inputs are closed the drive will use other parameters as the speed command source Manual Speed Sources The manual source for speed command to the drive is either the HIM requesting manual control see ALT Functions on page B 2 or the control terminal block analog input if a digital input is programmed to Auto Manual Changing Speed Sources The selection of the active Speed Reference can be made through digital inputs DPI command jog button or Auto Manual HIM operation Figure 1 10 Speed Reference Selection Chart Default Digital Inx Select Pl Exclusive Mode l Trim Speed Sel 3 2 1 p GE o p Dive Ret Rat Pure Reference Auto Speed Rer Options yy yi BIO EsciModo to follower drive for Speed Ref A Sel Parameter 090 01010 Frequency Reference Speed Ref B Sel Parame
193. lly load the present Auto frequency 1 Enabled reference value into the HIM when Man ual is selected Allows smooth speed transition from Auto to Manual Save MOP Ref Enables disables the feature that saves the present MOP frequency reference at power down or at stop KS X A SS xixixixixixioio 1 Save at Power Down 765413210 0 Do Not Save x Reserved x x x x x x x x pa 9 8 Bit Factory Default Bit Values MOP Rate Default 1 0 Hz s Sets rate of change of the MOP 30 0 RPM s reference in response to a digital input Min Max 0 2 Maximum Freq 6 0 Maximum Freq Units 0 1 Hz s 0 1 RPM s Param Access Lvl Default 0 Basic Selects the parameter display level Options 0 Basic Basic Reduced param set 1 Advanced Advanced Full param set 2 Reserved Fan Pump Reduced fan pump set 3 Fan Pump 1 Adv Fan Pump Full fan pump set 4 Adv Fan Pump 1 1 Standard Control drives v3 001 amp up 3 39 Related 3 40 Group File No Drive Memory Programming and Parameters 197 198 199 200 201 202 Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Reset To Defalts Resets parameters to factory defaults except Language Param Access Lvl Voltage Class amp TorqProve Cnfg params 196 201 202 amp 600 e Option 1 resets paramet
194. lt level It is typically 200 250 of the drive continuous rating Difference between Commanded Speed and Encoder Speed has exceeded the level set in Spd Dev Band for a time period greater than Spd Band Integrat Output transistors have exceeded their maximum operating temperature Action Monitor the incoming AC line for low voltage or line power interruption 1 Check for damaged output transistors 2 Replace drive 1 Check wiring 2 Replace pulse generator Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive 1 Cycle power to the drive 2 If problem persists replace drive 1 Restore defaults 2 Reprogram parameters Check load requirements and Current Lmt Val setting Replace Main Control Board Replace Main Control Board Check for excess load improper DC boost setting DC brake volts set too high Check wiring between drive and motor 2 Check release of mechanical brake Verify that maximum ambient temperature has not been exceeded 2 Check fan 3 Check for excess load Fault UnderVoltage UserSet1 Chksum UserSet2 Chksum UserSet3 Chksum 1 No Q Type 101 102 103 O O See page 4 1 for a descri Description DC bus voltage fell below the minimum value of 407V DC at 400 480V input or 204V DC at 200 240V input Enable Disable with Fault Config 1 page 3 46 The checksum read from the user set does not match the
195. lt or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed These inputs outputs are dependant on a number of parameters See Related Parameters Differential Isolation External source must be maintained at less than 160V with respect to PE Input provides high common mode immunity Differential Isolation External source must be less than 10V with respect to PE 150mA maximum Load Not present on 115V versions 1 18 Installation Wiring Figure 1 8 Vector Control Option UO Terminal Designations gt Be gS SS A Description co 1 Analog In 1 2 Isolated 9 bipolar differential 320 2 Analog In 1 10V 4 20mA 11 bit 8 sign 88k 327 3 Analog In 2 C ohm input impedance For 4 20mA 9 8 a jumper must be installed at 4 Analog In 2 terminals 17 amp 18 or 19 amp 20 5 Pot Common For and 10V pot references 6 Analog Out 1 2 Bipolar current output is not 340 7 Analog Out 1 bipolar 10V 4 20mA 11 bit amp 347 8 Analog Out 2 sign voltage mode limit current to 5 g mA Current mode max load 9 Analog Out 2 resistance is 400 ohms 10 Reserved for Future Use 11 Digital Out 1 N C Fault Max Resistive Load 380 12 Digital Out 1 Common 240V AC 30V
196. lter Min Max 0 1 0 9 Hz Units 0 1 Hz 421 Marker Pulse Default Read Only Latches the raw encoder count at each Min Max 2147483647 marker pulse Units 1 422 Pulse In Scale Default 64 O Sets the scale factor gain for the Pulse Min Max 2 20000 m Input when P423 is set to Pulse Input Units 1 2 E Calculate for the desired speed S 2 command as follows 2 2 for Hz Pulse In Scale Gil v Input Pulse Rate Hz E E Desired Cmd Hz for RPM Pulse In Scale Input Pulse Rate Hz 120 Desired Cmd RPM Motor Poles 423 Encoder Z Chan Default Pulse Input 9 Defines if the input wired to terminals 5 amp Options Pulse Input 6 of the Encoder Terminal Block will be used as a Pulse or Marker input Options 1 amp 3 detect a loss of signal when using Marker Input 0 0 1 Pulse Check 2 3 Marker Check differential inputs regardless of the Feedback Select param 080 setting Speed Command File Ss Parameter Name amp Description Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions File Group Related Values 079 Speed Units Default 0 HZ 9 Selects the units to be used for all speed Options 0 Hz related parameters Options 0 amp 1 1 RPM indicate status only Options 2 amp 3 will 2 Convert Hz convert configure the drive for that 3 Convert RPM selection Convert Hz 2 converts all speed based parameters to H
197. m protection device size is the highest rated device that supplies drive protection For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum 3 Circuit Breaker inverse time breaker For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum 4 Motor Circuit Protector instantaneous trip circuit breaker For US NEC minimum size is 125 of motor FLA Ratings shown are maximum 5 Bulletin 140M with adjustable current range should have the current trip set to the minimum range that the device will not trip 6 Manual Self Protected Type E Combination Motor Controller UL listed for 208 Wye or Delta 240 Wye or Delta 480Y 277 or 600Y 347 Not UL listed for use on 480V or 600V Delta Delta systems 7 The AIC ratings of the Bulletin 140M Motor Protector may vary See publication 140M SG001B EN P 8 Maximum allowable rating by US NEC Exact size must be chosen for each installation UOIEWJOJU BAU ejuawajddns ev A 14 Supplemental Drive Information Table A G 540 Volt DC Input Protection Devices j kW DC Input Ge Rating ga Output Amps Number i ND HD Amps KW Cont 1Min 3 Sec Fuse Bussmann Style Fuse 540 Volt DC Input 20BC1P3 1 0 37 0 25 1 3 1012 1 4 1 9 3 BUSSMANN_JKS 3 20BC2P1 1 10 75 0 55 2 1 11 21 24 32 6 BUSSMANN JKS 6 20BC3P5 1 15 075 3 7 20 35 45 6 0 8 BUSSMANN_JKS 8 20BC5P0 1 22 15 53 29 5
198. may exist even when main AC power is not applied to then drive Correct the malfunction before continuing t ATTENTION Power must be applied to the drive to perform the Prepare For Drive Start Up Before Applying Power to the Drive 1 Confirm that all inputs are connected to the correct terminals and are secure 2 Verify that AC line power at the disconnect device is within the rated value of the drive 3 Verify that control power voltage is correct The remainder of this procedure requires that a HIM be installed If an operator interface is not available remote devices should be used to start up the drive 2 2 Start Up Applying Power to the Drive 4 Apply AC power and control voltages to the drive If any of the six digital inputs are configured to Stop CF CF Clear Fault or Enable verify that signals are present or reconfigure Digital Inx Sel If an I O option is not installed i e no I O terminal block verify that Digital Inx Sel is not configured to Stop CF or Enable If this is not done the drive will not start Refer to Alarm Descriptions on page 4 10 for a list of potential digital input conflicts If a fault code appears refer to Chapter 4 If the STS LED is not flashing green at this point refer to Status Indicators below 5 Proceed to Start Up Routines Status Indicators Figure 2 1 Drive Status Indicators
199. mbers 140 7 480 Volt AC Input 20BD1P1 0 0 5 0 33 4 50 0 9 Oy IS 1 2 1 6 3 3 3 6 15 3 M C2E B16 20BD2P1 0 1 0 75 4 50 1 6 14 24 24 32 3 6 3 8 15 3 M C2E B25 20BD3P4 0 2 15 4 50 2 6 22 34 4 5 6 0 4 8 4 12 15 7 M C2E B40 M D8E B40 20BD5PO 0 3 2 4 50 3 9 32 50 55 75 6 10 6 20 20 7 M C2E B63 M D8E B63 20BD8PO 0 5 3 4 50 6 9 5 7 8 0 8 8 12 10 15 10 30 30 15 M C2E C10 M D8E C10 M F8E C10 20BD011 0 7 5 5 4 50 9 5 7 9 11 12 1 16 5 15 20 15 40 40 15 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BD014 1 10 7 5 4 50 125 10 4 14 15 ee 17 5 30 17 5 50 50 20 M C2E C16 M D8E C16 M F8E C16 20BD022 1 15 10 J4 50 19 9 16 6 22 24 2 33 25 50 25 80 80 30 M C2E C25 M D8E C25 M F8E C25 CMN 2500 20BD027 2 20 15 4 50 248 20 6 27 33 44 35 60 35 100 100 50 M F8E C32 CMN 4000 20BD034 2 25 20 4 50 312 25 9 34 405 54 40 70 40 125 125 50 M F8E C45 CMN 4000 20BD040 3 30 25 4 50 367 30 5 40 51 68 50 90 50 150 150 50 M F8E C45 CMN 4000 20BD052 3 40 30 4 50 47 7 39 7 52 60 80 60 110 60 200 200 70 S CMN 6300 20BD065 3 50 40 4 50 59 6 49 6 65 78 104 80 125 80 250 250 100 CMN 9000 20BD077 4 60 4 50 723 60 1 77 85 116 100 170 100 300 300 100 CMN 9000 50 4 50 59 6 49 6 65 98 130 80 125 80 250 250 100 CMN 9000 20BD096 5 75 4 50 90 1 74 9 96 106 144 125 200 125 350 350 125 m 60 4 50 72 3 60 1 77
200. mming 3 1 PTC Conflict Alarm 4 11 Publications Reference P 2 Pulse In Loss Fault 4 8 Pulse In Scale 3 21 Pulse Input 1 19 Pulse Input Ref 3 25 PWM Frequency 3 31 Pwr Brd Chksum Fault 4 8 Pwr Brd Chksum2 4 8 PWR LED 4 2 R Ramp Rates Group 3 31 Ramped Speed 3 13 Rated Amps 3 14 Rated kW 3 14 Rated Volts 3 14 Ratings Drive A 7 Reference Control 1 22 Reference Manual P 1 Reference Mask 3 51 Reference Material P 2 Reference Owner 3 52 Regen Power Limit 3 32 Removing Cover 1 1 Repeated Start Stop 1 12 Replaced MCB PB Fault 4 8 Reset Meters 3 40 Reset to Defaults 3 40 B 4 Restart Modes Group 3 34 Rev Speed Limit 3 23 Reverse Speed Limit C 16 Run Boost 3 19 S S Curve 3 31 S M A R T Start Up 2 3 Safety Ground 1 4 Save HIM Ref 3 39 Save MOP Ref 3 39 Save To User Set 3 40 Saving Data B 4 Scale In Hi 3 48 Scale In Lo 3 48 Scale In Value 3 48 Scale Out Hi 3 48 Scale Out Lo 3 48 Scale Out Value 3 48 Scaled Blocks Group 3 48 SCANport Vector Control P 5 Setting Preferences B 4 Shear Pin Fault 4 8 Shear Pin Time 3 38 Shielded Cables Power 1 6 SHLD Terminal 1 4 Short Circuit Protection 1 5 Signal Wire 1 15 Skip Freq Band 3 23 Skip Frequency C 17 Skip Frequency x 3 23 Sleep Config Alarm 4 11 Sleep Level 3 37 Sleep Time 3 37 Sleep Wake Mode C 19 Sleep Wake Mode 3 36 Sleep Wake Ref 3 37 Slip Comp Gain 3 26 Slip Comp Group 3 26 Slip RPM FLA
201. mp Vector Control Installation Wiring 1 25 EMC Instructions CE Conformity Conformity with the Low Voltage LV Directive and Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive has been demonstrated using harmonized European Norm EN standards published in the Official Journal of the European Communities PowerFlex Drives comply with the EN standards listed below when installed according to the User and Reference Manual CE Declarations of Conformity are available online at http www ab com certification ce docs Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC e EN50178 Electronic equipment for use in power installations EMC Directive 89 336 EEC e EN61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods General Notes e H the adhesive label is removed from the top of the drive the drive must be installed in an enclosure with side openings less than 12 5 mm 0 5 in and top openings less than 1 0 mm 0 04 in to maintain compliance with the LV Directive e The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emission as well as capacitive currents e Use of line filters in ungrounded systems is not recommended e PowerFlex drives may cause radio frequency interference if used in a residential or domestic environment The installer is required to take measures to prevent interference in addition to the essential requirements for C
202. n condition is 11 At Current 3 removed Refer to pages 1 18 amp 12 At Torque 3 147 13 AtTemp 2 Vector Control Option Only H M EE 3 Activation level is defined in Dig Outx E o ad S Level below faxing 4 17 Curr Limit Vector firmware 3 001 and later 18 Economize 5 When TorgProve Cnfg is set to 19 Motor Overld Enable Digital Out1 Sel becomes 20 Power Loss the brake control and any other 2126 Input 1 6 Link selection will be ignored 27 PI Enable 2 Refer to Option Definitions on 28 PI Hold page 3 56 29 Drive Overload 30 Param Cnti 4 6 Dig Out1 Level Default 0 0 Dig Out2 Level 0 0 Dig Out3 Level Min Max 0 0 819 2 Sets the relay activation level for options Units 0 1 10 15 in Digital Outx Sel Units are assumed to match the above selection i e At Freq lt Hz At Torque Amps io o NO Io IO l io iO 95 Io I LE IN pes ico e pl IND m o sd ka Ln Z E E SA IG o qe CO Es Ka Y Ico Ka 00 Io Ra E E n E gt 9 o N E E a File Applications Torque Proving Group o 2 3 2 E 2 o i a Group No 383 387 391 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Dig Out1 OnTime Default 0 00 Sec
203. not actual data it represents a value Table B B lists the parameters that can be destinations All links must be established between equal data types parameter value formatted in floating point can only source data to a destination parameter value B 6 HIM Overview Each link has 2 components e Source parameter sender of information that is also floating point Establishing A Link Step Key s Example Displays 1 Select a valid destination parameter see Table B B to be linked refer to page B 5 The parameter value screen will appear 2 Press Enter to edit the parameter The cursor will move to the value line 3 Press ALT and then View Sel Next press the Up or Down Arrow to change Present Value to Define Link Press Enter 4 Enter the Source Parameter Number and press Enter The linked parameter can now be viewed two different ways by repeating steps 1 4 and selecting Present Value or Define Link If an attempt is made to edit the value of a linked parameter Parameter is Linked will be displayed indicating that the value is coming from a source parameter and can not be edited 5 To remove a link repeat steps 1 5 and change the source parameter number to zero 0 6 Press Esc to return to the group list e D O FOR Parameter Accel Time 1 Decel Time 1 Accel Time 2 Min 0 1 Secs Max 3600 0 Secs Dflt 10 0 Secs Present Value Define Lin
204. nt of maximum motor current every 250 microseconds DB While Stopped Enables disables dynamic brake operation when drive is stopped DB may operate if input voltage becomes too high Disabled DB will only operate when drive is running Enable DB may operate whenever drive is energized Genre Stop Mode A FIERET Stop Mode B Active stop mode Stop Mode A is active unless Stop Mode B is selected by inputs 1 When using options 1 or 2 refer to the Attention statements at DC Brake Level Stop Brk Mode A Stop Brk Mode B See description above DC Brake Lvl Sel Selects the source for DC Brake Level Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Options Default Default Options Default Options 0 0 RPM 0 0 200 0 RPM 0 1 RPM 50 0 800 0 0 0 0 1 400 0 1 0 800 0 0 1 Disabled 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Ramp Coast Coast Ramp Ramp to Hold DC Brake GO M ch OO O ch DC Brake Lvl DC Brake Lvl Analog In 1 Analog In 2 M ch OO o Related o SA Co io Gu 29 o IN um SA K i lea GA CO Sx LO A IcO 00 ID C1 File Stop Brake Modes Group No 158 159 160 161 162 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions DC Bra
205. ntactor or other device that routinely disconnects and reapplies the AC line to the drive to start and stop the motor can cause drive hardware damage The drive is designed to use control input signals that will start and stop the motor If an input device is used oper ation must not exceed one cycle per minute or drive damage will occur ATTENTION The drive start stop enable control circuitry includes solid state components If hazards due to accidental contact with mov ing machinery or unintentional flow of liquid gas or solids exist an additional hardwired stop circuit may be required to remove the AC line to the drive An auxiliary braking method may be required Output Contactor Precaution ATTENTION To guard against drive damage when using output contactors the following information must be read and understood One or more output contactors may be installed between the drive and motor s for the purpose of disconnecting or isolating certain motors loads If a contactor is opened while the drive is operating power will be removed from the respective motor but the drive will continue to produce voltage at the output terminals In addition reconnecting a motor to an active drive by closing the contactor could produce excessive current that may cause the drive to fault If any of these conditions are determined to be undesirable or unsafe an auxiliary contact on the output contactor should be wired to a drive digital input that is p
206. o Programming and Parameters 602 603 604 605 606 607 608 60 eo 610 61 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Spd Dev Band Defines the allowable difference between the commanded frequency and encoder feedback value A fault will occur when the difference exceeds this value for a period of time SpdBand Integrat Sets the amount of time before a fault is issued when Spd Dev Band is outside its threshold Brk Release Time Sets the amount of time between commanding the brake to release and the start of frequency acceleration ZeroSpdFloatTime Sets the amount of time the drive is below Float Tolerance before the brake is set Float Tolerance Sets the frequency level where the float timer starts Brk Set Time Defines the amount of delay time between commanding the brake to be set and the start of brake proving TorqLim SlewRate Sets the rate to ramp the torque limits to zero during brake proving BrkSlip Count Sets the number of encoder counts to define a brake slippage condition Brk Alarm Travel Sets the number of motor shaft revolutions allowed during the brake slippage test Drive torque is reduced to check for brake slippage When slippage occurs the drive allows this number of motor shaft revolutions before regaining control MicroPos Scale Sets the percent of speed reference to be used w
207. o O I o Ico Ico 3 26 Programming and Parameters G ES lt a jo Oo D rr Lu a 7 Slip Comp 120 121 122 123 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Trim Setpoint Default 0 096 Adds or subtracts a percentage of the Min Max 200 0 speed reference or maximum speed Units 0 196 Dependent on the setting of Trim Out Select parameter 118 Trim In Select Default 2 Analog In 2 Specifies which analog input signal is Options See Speed Ref A being used as a trim input Sel Trim Out Select Specifies which speed references are to be trimmed MA A SOS amp AS S la 1 Trimmed x x x x x x ojo o IT CAE ds X X X X X X X pus 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit Factory Default Bit Values Trim Hi Scales the upper value of the Trim In Select selection when the source is an analog input Trim Lo Scales the lower value of the Trim In Select selection when the source is an analog input Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Vector firmware 3 001 amp later 60 0 Hz Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM 0 0 Hz Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM Important Parameters in the Slip Comp Group are used to enable and tune the Slip Compensation Regulator In order to allow the regulator to control drive operation parameter 080 Spee
208. o SA de io Gu 29 o SA Co IK Ic Z Ico Programming and Parameters 3 31 Dynamic Control File o Parameter Name amp Description ir 2 see page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 140 Accel Time 1 Default 10 0 Secs 142 141 Accel Time 2 10 0 Secs 143 Sets the rate of accel for all speed Min Max 0 1 3600 0 Secs a increases 0 0 3600 0 Secs HEM P Units 0 1 Secs Max Speed _ Accel Time Accel Rate n 1142 Decel Time 1 Default 10 0 Secs 140 2 143 Decel Time 2 10 0 Secs 141 a Sets the rate of decel for all speed Min Max 0 1 3600 0 Secs Sa E decreases 0 0 3600 0 Secs BRE E Units 0 1 Secs Max Speed _ Decel Time Decel Rate 146 S Curve Default 0 140 Sets the percentage of accel or decel Min Max 0 100 Hs time that is applied to the ramp as S Units 1 Kee Curve Time is added 1 2 at the beginning and 1 2 at the end of the ramp 147 Current Lmt Sel Default 0 Cur Lim Val 146 O Selects the source for the adjustment of Options 0 Cur Lim Val c current limit i e parameter analog input 1 Analog In 1 etc 2 Analog In 2 148 Current Lmt Val Default Rated Amps x 1 5 147 Defines the current limit value when ere hohe approxi 149 Current Lmt Sel Cur Lim Val mate default value Min Max Based on Drive Rating Units 0 1 Amps 149 Current Lmt Gain Default 250 147 Sets the responsiveness of the current Min Max
209. o i C Vector9 24V DC AC F 690VAC 3 o D Vector 115V AC H 540V DCH N J 650VDC N N Std None P 540VDC Y 400V 60Hz Input 480V 60Hz Input 600V 60Hz Input 690V 60Hz Input R 650VDC Y 400V 480V 600V 690V Code Amps kW Code Amps HP Code Amps HP Code Amps kW Code Version Code Type 1P3 1 3 037 1P1 11 05 1P7 17 10 052 52 45 C ControlNet Coax ADO 60Hz Maximum 2P1 24 075 2P1 24 1 0 2P7 27 20 060 60 55 D DeviceNet 208 240V 60Hz Input 3P5 35 15 3P4 34 20 3P9 39 3 0 082 82 75 E EtherNet IP 208V 240V 5PO 50 22 5PO 50 30 6P1 61 5 0 098 98 90 R RIO Code Amps Amps HP 8P7 87 4 0 8P0 80 50 9P0 90 75 119 119 110 S RS485 2P2 25 22 05 011 115 55 00 11 75 0 11 10 142 142 132 N None 4P2 48 42 10 015 154 75 014 14 10 017 17 15 6P8 78 68 20 022 22 11 022 22 15 022 22 20 9P6 11 96 30 030 30 15 027 27 20 027 27 25 015 175 153 50 037 37 185 04 34 25 032 32 30 f 022 253 22 75 043 43 22 040 40 30 041 41 40 O Not available for Frame 3 drives or larger 028 322 28 10 056 56 30 052 52 40 052 52 50 Brake IGBT is standard on Frames 0 3 and optional on Frames 4 6 042 483 42 15 02 72 37 065 65 50 062 62 60 Note CE Certification testing has not been performed on 600V class drives o i 7 E pa 085 85 45 077 77 60 077 77 75 O Frames 5 amp 6 Only He E o ai 105 105 55 096 96 75 099 99 100 Vector Control Option utilizes DPI Only 104 120 104 40 125 125 55 125 125 100 125 125 125 O Must be used with Vector Control option C or D position 15 Positions 17 20 are
210. oder to Poner Supply Encoder D Si I Common o Si I Single Ended Jer fesse Differential CS P Hz P Hz T Dual Channel ee 1 Dual Tenor T Channel 3 mH ANOT E J Anot Sp 1 aA U Hardware Enable Circuitry Vector Control Option Only By default the user can program a digital input as an Enable input The status of this input is interpreted by drive software If the application requires the drive to be disabled without software interpretation a dedicated hardware enable configuration can be utilized This is done by removing a jumper and wiring the enable input to Digital In 6 see below 1 Remove the I O Control Cassette amp A L cover as described on page 1 16 Locate amp remove Jumper J10 on the Main Control Board see diagram Re assemble cassette 4 Wire Enable to Digital In 6 see Figure 1 8 Verify that Digital In6 Sel parameter 366 is set to 1 Enable SS 1 20 Installation Wiring 1 0 Wiring Examples Standard amp Vector Control Options Input Output Connection Example Required Parameter Changes Potentiometer e Adjust Scaling Unipolar Speed Parameters 91 92 and 325 326
211. oint for the motor cable shield The motor cable shield should be connected to this terminal on the drive drive end and the motor frame motor end A shield terminating cable gland may also be used When shielded cable is used for control and signal wiring the shield should be grounded at the source end only not at the drive end RFI Filter Grounding Using an optional RFI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents Therefore the filter must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded bonded to the building power distribution ground Ensure that the incoming supply neutral is solidly connected bonded to the same building power distribution ground Grounding must not rely on flexible cables and should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection Some local codes may require redundant ground connections The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked Refer to the instructions supplied with the filter Installation Wiring 1 5 Fuses and Circuit Breakers The PowerFlex 700 can be installed with either input fuses or an input circuit breaker National and local industrial safety regulations and or electrical codes may determine additional requirements for these installations Refer to Appendix A for recommended fuses circuit breakers ATTENTION The PowerFlex 700 does not provide branch short
212. olts x 0 25 Rated Volts 0 1 VAC P CLO M zz CH Oc Ccrno c 3 15 Related IS LE Io Io ES IND Io IND ES IS no IS IND IND Ic 3 16 File MOTOR CONTROL Torq Attributes Programming and Parameters 055 05 D 057 058 05 eo Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Maximum Freq Default 110 0 or 130 0 Hz Sets the highest frequency the drive will Min Max 5 0 420 0 Hz output Refer to Overspeed Limit 083 Units 0 1 Hz Compensation Enables disables correction options 1 Enabled Oz Disabled x Reserved 1 For current limit except FVC Vector mode 2 Standard Control Option Only N Vector Control Option Only 6 00 gt lt NI o a A wo x x x x x x x ps 14 13 12 11 10 9 Bit Factory Default Bit Values Vector firmware 2 003 amp later Vector firmware 3 001 amp later Option Descriptions Reflect Wave Disables reflected wave overvoltage protection for long cable lengths typically enabled Enable Jerk In non FVC Vector modes disabling jerk removes a short S curve at the start of the accel decel ramp Ixo AutoCalc Not functional reserved for future enhancements Xsistor Diag Disables power transistor power diagnostic tests which run at each start command Rs Adapt FVC w Encoder Only Disabling may improve torque regula
213. ommanded frequency is less than the skip center frequency and greater than or equal to the low value of the band skip minus 1 2 band the drive will set the output frequency to the low value of the band See B in Figure C 8 Acceleration and deceleration are not affected by the skip frequencies Normal accel decel will proceed through the band once the commanded frequency is greater than the skip frequency See A amp B in Figure C 8 This function affects only continuous operation within the band C 18 Application Notes Skip Frequency Examples The skip frequency will have hysteresis so the output does not toggle between high and low values Three distinct bands can be programmed If none of the skip bands touch or overlap each band has its own high low limit Max Frequency Skip Frequency 1 Skip Band 1 Skip Band 2 Skip Frequency 2 0Hz If skip bands overlap or touch the e 400 Hz center frequency is recalculated based on the highest and lowest band values Adjusted Skip Frequency 1 Skip Band Skip Frequency 2 w Recalculated Skip Frequency DH If a skip band s extend beyond the RES max frequency limits the highest band value will be clamped at the max frequency limit The center frequency is recalculated based on the highest and lowest band values Adjusted Max Frequency Skip Band w Recalculated If the band is outside the limits the skip band is inact
214. ommon mode immunity Contacts in unpowered state Any relay programmed as Fault or Alarm will energize pick up when power is applied to drive and deenergize drop out when a fault or alarm exists Relays selected for other functions will energize only when that condition exists and will deenergize when condition is removed 150mA maximum Load Not present on 115V versions Installation Wiring 1 19 Encoder Terminal Block Vector Control Option Only Table 1 H Encoder Terminal Designations No Description refer to page A 3 for encoder specifications See Detail in 8 12V 1 DC Power Internal power source Figure 1 6 7 12V DC Return Common 250 mA 6 Encoder Z NOT Pulse marker or registration 5 Encoder Z input 4 Encoder B NOT Quadrature B input 3 Encoder B 2 Encoder A NOT Single channel or 1 Encoder A quadrature A input 1 Jumper selectable 5 12V is available on 20B ENC 2 Encoder Boards only Z channel can be used as a pulse input while A amp B are used for encoder 2 Figure 1 9 Sample Encoder Wiring 1 0 Connection Example 1 0 Connection Example Encoder EI Encoder P 8 jes ower ry Power Internal Drive e External Power 5 vaan Power Internal drive Source 12V DC 2 250mA Enc
215. on Mode 190 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Load Frm Usr Set 198 Language 201 Reset To Defalts 197 Save To User Set 199 Diagnostics Start Inhibits 214 Dig In Status 216 Dig Out Status 217 Faults Fault Config 1 238 Alarms Alarm Configi 259 Inputs amp Analog Inputs Anlg In Config 320 Analog In2 Hi 325 Outputs Analog In1 Hi 322 Analog In2 Lo 326 Analog Int Lo 323 og Outputs Analog Outt 2 Sel 342 Analog Out 2 Lo 344 Analog Out2 Hi 346 Analog Out Hi 343 Analog Out 2 Sel 345 Analog Out 2 Lo 347 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out1 3 Sel 380 388 Dig Out1 3 Level 381 389 A 5 D These parameters will only be displayed when parameter 053 Motor Cntl Sel is set to option 4 3 6 File Monitor Speed Command Dynamic Control nr Programming and Parameters Advanced Parameter View Standard Control Option Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 1 Advanced Group Metering Parameters Output Freq 001 Commanded Freq 002 Output Current 002 Torque Current 004 Flux Current 005 Output Voltage 006 Output Power 007 Output Powr Fctr 008 Elapsed MWh 009 Elapsed Run Time 010 MOP Frequency DC Bus Voltage DC Bus Memory Analog In1 Value Analog In2 Value 011 012 013 016 017 Drive Data Motor Data Rated kW 026 Rated Volts 027 Motor Type 040 Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP FLA 042
216. onditions in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 PowerFlex 700 EN61800 3 EMC Compatibility Second Environment Industrial HI l a External filter Not Required if motor First Environment e cables are restricted to design shown Restricted Distribution Any Drive and Option 0 6 Restrict Motor Cable to 30 m 98 ft 2 1 Motor cable limited to 30 m 98 ft for installations in the second industrial environment without additional external line filters 2 Refer to the PowerFlex 70 700 Reference Manual for installations in the first residential environment and installations in the second environment with motor cables longer than 30 m 98 ft Chapter 2 Start Up This chapter describes how you start up the PowerFlex 700 Drive Refer to Appendix B for a brief description of the LCD HIM Human Interface Module For information on See page Prepare For Drive Start Up 2 1 Status Indicators 2 2 Start Up Routines 2 3 Running S M A R T Start 2 4 Running an Assisted Start Up 2 4 following start up procedure Some of the voltages present are at incoming line potential To avoid electric shock hazard or damage to equipment only qualified service personnel should perform the following procedure Thoroughly read and understand the procedure before beginning If an event does not occur while performing this procedure Do Not Proceed Remove Power including user supplied control voltages User supplied voltages
217. only 140 140 75 156 156 125 144 144 150 required when custom firmware is supplied 130 130 130 50 170 170 90 180 180 150 ges ER a 154 177 154 60 205 205 110 248 248 200 O Positions 16 20 of the catalog number are not applicable for Canada These options 192 221 192 75 260 260 132 positions 16 20 are only available as User Installed in Canada He S d P 6 Overview Notes Chapter 1 Installation Wiring This chapter provides information on mounting and wiring the PowerFlex 700 Drive For information on Seepage Forinformation on See page Opening the Cover 1 1 Disconnecting MOVs and 1 13 Mounting Considerations 1 2 Common Mode Capacitors AC Supply Source Considerations 1 2 1 0 Wiring 1 15 General Grounding Requirements 1 4 Reference Control 1 22 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 5 Auto Manual Examples 1 23 Power Wiring 15 Lifting Torque Proving 1 24 EMC Instructions 1 25 Most start up difficulties are the result of incorrect wiring Every precaution must be taken to assure that the wiring is done as instructed All items must be read and understood before the actual installation begins installation The Allen Bradley Company cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or the noncompliance to any code national local or otherwise for the proper installation of this drive or associated equipment A hazard of personal injury and or equipment damage exists if codes are
218. ons 1 2 AC Supply Source Considerations 1 2 General Grounding Requirements 1 4 Fuses and Circuit Breakers 1 5 Power IO EE 1 5 Using Input Output Contactors 1 12 Disconnecting MOVs and CM Capacitors 1 13 I O Wiring cis 1 15 Reference Cono 1 22 Auto Manual Examples 1 23 Lifting Torque Proving 1 24 Common Bus Precharge Notes 1 24 EMC Instructions 1 25 Prepare For Drive Start Up 2 1 Status Indicators een e 2 2 Star Upi Routines TT 2 3 Running S M A R T Start 2 4 Running an Assisted Start Up 2 4 len GEET 3 1 How Parameters are Organized 3 3 Monto 3 12 Motor Control File 3 14 Speed Command File 3 21 Dynamic Control File 3 31 DTE oe quce puc ey 3 38 Communication File 3 49 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 53 TEE 3 59 Parameter Cross Reference by Name 3 61 Parameter Cross Reference by Number 3 64 Faults and Alarms 4 1 EE DUT 4 2 Manually Clearing Faults 4 4 Fault Descriptions a a 4 4 Clearing Alarms e eee 4 9 Alarm Descriptions lesesee 4 10 Common Symptoms Corrective Actions 4 13 Testpoint Codes and Functions 4 16 ii Table of Contents Appendix A Supplemental Drive Specifications 0 A 1 Information Communication Configurations
219. or Association wy Document Update PowerFlex 700 User Manual Update This document provides important information for the following PowerFlex 700 User Manuals Series A publication 20B UM001x xx x Series B publication 20B UM002x xx x Included is new information about using the PowerFlex 700 drive with an Auxiliary Control Power Supply such as the 20 24V AUX1 Place this document with your User Manual for future reference Auxiliary Control Power Supply An Auxiliary Control Power Supply can provide control power for certain PowerFlex 700 drives See details below used with any PowerFlex 700 Standard Control drive or 200 240 Volt ATTENTION The Auxiliary Control Power Supply Must Not be Vector Control drive Using the power supply with these drives will cause equipment component damage The Auxiliary Control Power Supply Must Not be used with Any Standard Control drive 15 position of the catalog number string equals A B or N Any 200 240V PowerFlex 700 drive Standard or Vector Control 4th position of the catalog number string equals B The Auxiliary Control Power Supply Can be used with 400 480 and 600 690 Volt drives with Vector Control 15 position of the catalog number string equals C or D Consult the factory when using an auxiliary power supply in these instances Use of an auxiliary power supply to keep the drive control logic up when the main AC power is
220. or must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 In addition installing a properly sized dynamic brake resistor will provide equal or better performance in most cases Important These faults are not instantaneous Test results have shown that they can take between 2 12 seconds to occur ATTENTION Loss of control in suspended load applications can cause personal injury and or equipment damage Loads must always be controlled by the drive or a mechanical brake Parameters 600 611 are designed for lifting torque proving applications It is the responsibility of the engineer and or end user to configure drive parameters test any lifting functionality and meet safety requirements in accordance with all applicable codes and standards Catalog Number Explanation The PowerFlex 700 catalog numbering scheme is shown on page P 5 Position 1 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 160 17 189 19 200 20B D 2P1 A 3 A Y NN AD Resistor Emission Comm Slot I O Feedback Future Custom Use Firmware Code Type Code Enclosure Code Operator Interface Code w BrakelGBT Code CE Filter CM Choke Code Type 20B 700 A IP 20 0 Blank Cover Y Yes A Yes Yes 0 None NEMA Type1 2 Digital LCD N No B Yes No 1 Encoder 12V Code Voltage Ph Prechg N Open 3 Full Numeric LCD E 20r i E Ana PU iets Code Type Code w Resistor ode Control UO Volts D ema HU A User Manual Y Yes A Std 24V DC AC e N No Manual N No B Std 115V AC E 600VAC 3
221. ord 1 Data Related Data In C2 Link C Word 2 In A2 Link A Word 2 Data In D1 Link D Word 1 See Data In A1 Link A Word 1 Data Data In D2 Link D Word 2 In A2 Link A Word 2 Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Default 0 0 Disabled Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Min Max 0 387 COMMUNICATIONS Parameter number whose value will be 0 544 written to a communications device data 0 611 II table Units 1 312 Data Out B1 Link B Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 313 Data Out B2 Link B Word 2 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 314 Data Out C1 Link C Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 315 Data Out C2 Link C Word 2 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Data Out D1 Link D Word 1 See Data Out A1 Link A Word 1 Data Out D2 Link D Word 2 Data Out A2 Link A Word 2 Inputs amp Outputs File 3 o Parameter Name amp Description 3 ir See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 320 Anlg In Config 322 Selects the mode for the analog inputs 325 323 YI SE AP 326 IS SS X X X X X X X x x x X X X X1 0 0 ebe rower 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values Anlg In Sqr Root Enables disables the square root function for each input 32 INPUTS amp OUTPUTS Analog Inputs N SS Yo 5 E 1 Enable x X X X X X X i 0 Dis
222. ostics Group 3 41 Dig In Conflict Alarm 4 10 Dig In Status 3 43 Dig Out Setpt 3 58 Dig Out Status 3 43 Dig Outx Level 3 58 Dig Outx OffTime 3 59 Dig Outx OnTime 3 59 Digital Inputs Group 3 57 Digital Inx Sel 3 57 Digital Outputs Group 3 57 Digital Outx Sel 3 58 Dimensions Bottom View A 19 Drive A 15 Minimum Clearances 1 2 Mounting PowerFlex 700 A 15 A 17 Direction Config Group 3 38 Direction Mask 3 51 Direction Mode 3 38 Direction Owner 3 52 Discrete Speeds Group 3 25 Distribution Systems Unbalanced 1 3 Ungrounded 1 3 DPI Baud Rate 3 49 DPI Data Rate 3 49 DPI Fdbk Select 3 50 DPI Port 1 5 Fault 4 7 DPI Port Locations B 1 DPI Port Sel 3 50 DPI Port Value 3 50 DPI Ref Select 3 50 Drive Alarm 1 3 41 Drive Alarm 2 3 41 3 42 Drive Checksum 3 41 Drive Data Group 3 14 Drive Frame Size P 3 Index 3 Drive Grounding 1 4 Drive Logic Rslt 3 49 Drive Memory Group 3 39 Drive OL Count 3 43 Drive OL Level Alarm 4 10 Drive OL Mode 3 31 Drive Overload Fault 4 5 Drive Powerup Fault 4 5 Drive Ramp Rslt 3 49 Drive Ratings A 7 Drive Ref Rslt 3 49 Drive Status 1 3 41 Drive Temp 3 43 DriveExecutive 3 1 DriveExplorer 3 1 Droop RPM FLA 3 32 Dynamic Brake Resistor Selection 3 34 Setup 3 33 Dynamic Control File 3 31 E Earthing see Grounding Editing Parameters 3 1 Elapsed kWh 3 13 Elapsed MWH 3 12 Elapsed Run Time 3 12 EMC Directive 1 25 Instructions 1 25 E
223. ot Accelerating 1 Accelerating D Decel 0 Not Decelerating 1 Decelerating X Alarm 0 No Alarm 1 Alarm X Fault 0 No Fault 1 Fault X At Speed 0 Not At Reference 1 At Reference x x x Local Control 1 000 Port 0 TB 001 Port 1 010 Port 2 011 Port3 100 Port 4 101 Port 5 110 Reserved 111 No Local x x x x Reference Source 1 See Owners on page 3 50 for further information 0000 Ref A Auto 0001 Ref B Auto 0010 Preset 2 Auto 0011 Preset 3 Auto 0100 Preset 4 Auto 0101 Preset 5 Auto 0110 Preset 6 Auto 0111 lt Preset 7 Auto 1000 Term Blk Manual 1001 DPI 1 Manual 1010 DPI 2 Manual 1011 DPI 3 Manual 1100 DPI 4 Manual 1101 DPI 5 Manual 1110 Reserved 1111 Jog Ref Supplemental Drive Information A 7 Output Devices Common mode cores are internal to the drive For information on output devices such as output contactors cable terminators and output reactors refer to the PowerFlex Reference Manual Drive Fuse amp Circuit Breaker Ratings The tables on the following pages provide drive ratings including continuous 1 minute and 3 second and recommended AC line input fuse and circuit breaker information Both types of short circuit protection are acceptable for UL and IEC requirements Sizes listed are the recommended sizes based on 40 degree C and the U S
224. ough the LEDs and or the HIM if present Front Panel LED Indications Figure 4 1 Typical Drive Status Indicators E a 9 Frames 021 E IN TE Name Color State Description OQ PWR Green Steady Illuminates when power is applied to the drive Power O STS Green Flashing Drive ready but not running amp no faults are present Status Steady Drive running no faults are present Yellow Flashing A start inhibit condition exists the drive cannot be See Drive Stopped started Check parameter 214 Start Inhibits page 4 10 Flashing An intermittent type 1 alarm condition is occurring Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Steady A continuous type 1 alarm condition exists Drive Running Check parameter 211 Drive Alarm 1 Red Flashing Fault has occurred Check Fault x Code or Fault Queue See Steady A non resettable fault has occurred page 4 4 O PORT Green Status of DPI port internal communications if present MOD Yellow Status of communications module when installed NETA Red Status of network if connected NET B Bed Status of secondary network if connected Name Power Troubleshooting 4 3 Precharge Board LED Indications Precharge Board LED indicators are found on Frame 5 amp 6 drives The LEDs are located above the Line Type jumper shown in Figure 1 2 Color Green State Steady ISL 1c Description ndicates
225. oup No Restart Modes 169 170 174 175 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Flying Start En Default 0 Disabled Enables disables the function which Options 0 Disabled reconnects to a spinning motor at actual 1 Enabled RPM when a start command is issued Not required in FVC Vector mode when using an encoder Flying StartGain Default 4000 Sets the response of the flying start Min Max 20 32767 function Units 1 Important Lower gain may be required for permanent magnet motors Auto Rstrt Tries Default 0 Sets the maximum number of times the Min Max 0 9 drive attempts to reset a fault and restart Units 1 ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do Not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines Auto Rstrt Delay Default 1 0 Secs Sets the time between restart attempts Min Max 0 5 30 0 Secs when Auto Rstrt Tries is set to a value Units 0 1 Secs other than zero 3 35 Related CH e n Ico CH o PN 3 36 Programming and Parameters mo o Parameter Name amp Description it Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 178 Sleep Wake Mode Default 0
226. output if the output is set to Input 1 6 Link This does not 361 need to be selected in the Vector option Input 1 6 Link When Digital Output 1 is set to one of these i e Input 3 Link in conjunction with 380 Digital Input 3 set to Excl Link the Digital Input 3 state on off is echoed in the Digital Output 1 Micro Pos Micropostion input When closed the command frequency is set to a percentage 361 speed reference as defined in MicroPos Scale parameter 611 MOP Dec Decrements speed reference as long as input is closed 361 MOP Inc Increments speed reference as long as input is closed 361 MtrTrqCurRef Torque producing current reference 342 Param Cntl Parameter controlled analog output allows PLC to control analog outputs through data 342 links Set in AnlgX Out Setpt parameters 377 378 Param Cntl Parameter controlled digital output allows PLC to control digital outputs through data 380 links Set in Dig Out Setpt parameter 379 Pl Reference Reference for PI block see Process Pl for Standard Control on page C 13 342 Precharge En Forces drive into precharge state Typically controlled by auxiliary contact on the 361 disconnect at the DC input to the drive Pulse In Ref Reference of the pulse input Z channel of encoder can be used while A amp B 342 channels are encoder inputs Scale Block 1 4 Output of scale blocks parameters 354 355 342 Torque Est Calculated percentage of rated motor torque 342
227. p inputs e Jumper from terminal 25 to 26 is required Incorrect digital input programming None Program Digital Inx Sel for correct e Mutually exclusive choices have been inputs See page 3 57 made i e Jog and Jog Forward Start or Run programming may be e 2wire and 3 wire programming may be missing conflicting Flashing yellow Program Digital Inx Sel to resolve e Exclusive functions i e direction control Status light and conflicts See page 3 57 may have multiple inputs configured Digln CfictB Remove multiple selections for the e Stop is factory default and is not wired me on same function Install stop button to apply a signal at Drive Status 2 stop terminal shows type 2 alarm s Drive does not Start from HIM Corrective Action If 2 wire control is required no action needed If 3 wire control is required program Digital Inx Sel for correct inputs See page 3 57 Cause s Drive is programmed for 2 wire control HIM Start button is disabled for 2 wire control Drive does not respond to changes in speed command Cause s Indication Corrective Action No value is coming from the source LCD HIM Status 1 If the source is an analog input check of the command Line indicates wiring and use a meter to check for At Speed and presence of signal 2 Check Commanded Freq for correct source See page 3 12 output is 0 Hz 4 14 Troubleshooting Cause s Indication Corr
228. page 2 3 to tune the motor However it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the hoist crane equipment during the routine If this is not possible refer to steps 1 through 12 on the following pages Application Notes C 3 ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage caused by unexpected brake release verify Digital Out 1 brake connections and or programming The default drive configuration energizes the Digital Out 1 relay when power is applied to the drive If the brake is connected to this relay it could be released If necessary disconnect the relay output until wiring programming can be verified A Initial Static Auto Tune Test 1 Set the following parameters as shown No Name Value Notes 380 Digital Out1 Sel 9 At Speed keeps brake engaged during test 041 045 Motor NP pernameplate enter motor nameplate data 053 Motor Cntl Sel 4 FVC Vector 080 Feedback Select 3 Encoder 061 Autotune 1 Static Tune 2 Press the Start key on the HIM Parameters 062 064 will be updated Motor Rotation Encoder Direction Test 3 Set the following parameters as shown No Name Value Notes 053 Motor Cntl Sel 0 Sensrls Vect 080 Feedback Select 0 Open Loop 090 Digital Out1 Sel 11 Preset Spd1 238 Fault Config 1 Bit 8 In PhaseLoss 1 Bit 12 OutPhaseLoss 1 380 Digital Out Sel 4 Run
229. parameter and uses 0 0 RPM Maximum Speed for reverse speed limit 3 24 Programming and Parameters cs o S E Parameter Name amp Description it Z See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values E 090 Speed Ref A Sel Default 2 Analog In 2 002 9 Selects the source of the speed Options 1 Analog In 1 reference to the drive unless Speed Ref 2 Analog In 2 we B Sel or Preset Speed 1 7 is selected 3 6 Reserved 101 7 Pulse In thru 1 See Appendix B for DPI port locations 8 Encoder 107 e 9 MOP Level 117 Vector firmware 3 001 and later 10 Reserved mm 11 Preset Spdt i 12 Preset Spd2 192 13 Preset Spd3 thru 14 Preset Spd4 i 15 Preset Spd5 213 16 Preset Spd6 ES 17 Preset Spd7 273 18 DPI Port 11 320 19 DPI Port 2 0 361 20 DPI Port 3 thru 21 DPI Port 4 1 E 22 DPI Port 5 1 CH o 2324 Reserved o 25 25 Scale Block1 E 26 Scale Block2 2 SE 27 Scale Block3 az 28 Scale Block4 2 5 amp 091 Speed Ref A Hi Default Maximum Speed 079 Scales the upper value of the Speed Ref Min Max Maximum Speed 082 A Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1 Hz analog input 0 01 RPM 092 Speed Ref A Lo Default 0 0 079 Scales the lower value of the Speed Ref Min Max Maximum Speed m A Sel selection when the source is an Units 0 1Hz analog input 0 01 RPM 093 Speed Ref
230. pe 1 to To remove vent plate see page A 20 for location lift top edge of plate from the chassis Rotate tv 101 6 mm degree of protecti protection against airborne contaminants such as dust or water 2 Open type 3 the plate out from the back plate Ju gt Ae 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 4 0in 40in UC gU 30 E se 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 4 0 in 4 0 in v v lt With Adhesive Label No Adhesive Label see Table 1 A see Table 1 A Refer to Appendix A for detailed dimension information Minimum Mounting Clearances Specified vertical clearance requirements are intended to be from drive to drive Other objects can occupy this space however reduced airflow may cause protection circuits to fault the drive In addition inlet air temperature must not exceed the product specification AC Supply Source Considerations aasre 4 0 in v 50 8 mm 2 0 in wonn uo Y uo Y 101 6 mm 101 6 mm 4 0 in 4 0 in b d v F G A PowerFlex 700 drives are suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering up to a maximum of 200 000 rms symmetrical amperes and a maximum of 600 volts Installation Wiring 1 3 ATTENTION To guard against personal injury and or equipment damage caused by improper fusing or circuit breaker selection use only the recommended line fuses circuit breakers specified in Appendix A If a system ground fault monitor RCD is
231. peed 3 22 MOP Frequency 3 13 MOP Mask 3 51 MOP Owner 3 52 MOP Rate 3 39 MOP Reference 3 13 Motor Cntl Sel 3 15 Motor Fdbk Type 3 20 Motor NP FLA 3 14 Motor NP Hertz 3 14 Motor NP Power 3 15 Motor NP RPM 3 14 Motor NP Volts 3 14 Motor OL Count 3 44 Motor OL Factor 3 15 Motor OL Hertz 3 15 Motor Poles 3 15 Motor Type 3 14 Mtr NP Pwr Units 3 15 Mtr Tor Cur Ref 3 19 Neg Torque Limit 3 19 Notch Filter Freq 3 20 Notch Filter K 3 21 Output Current 3 12 Output Freq 3 12 Output Power 3 12 Output Powr Fctr 3 12 Output Voltage 3 12 Overspeed Limit 3 22 Param Access Lvl 3 39 BW Filter 3 29 Configuration 3 27 Control 3 27 Deriv Time 3 29 Error Meter 3 29 Fdback Meter 3 28 Feedback Hi 3 29 Feedback Lo 3 29 Feedback Sel 3 28 PI Integral Time 3 28 Lower Limit 3 28 Output Meter 3 29 Preload 3 28 PI Prop Gain 3 28 Ref Meter 3 28 Reference Hi 3 29 PI Reference Lo 3 29 PI Reference Sel 3 27 PI Setpoint 3 27 PI Status 3 28 Upper Limit 3 28 Pos Torque Limit 3 19 Power Loss Level 3 38 Power Loss Mode 3 37 Power Loss Time 3 37 Powerup Delay 3 34 PowerUp Marker 3 46 Preset Speed x 3 25 Pulse In Scale 3 21 Pulse Input Ref 3 25 PWM Frequency 3 31 Ramped Speed 3 13 Rated Amps 3 14 Rated kW 3 14 Rated Volts 3 14 Reference Mask 3 51 Reference Owner 3 52 Regen Power Limit 3 32 Reset Meters 3 40 Reset To Defalts 3 40 Rev Speed Limit 3 23 Run Boost 3 19 S
232. power units Options to Horsepower Convert kW converts all power units to kilowatts Motor OL Hertz Default Selects the output frequency below Min Max which the motor operating current is Units derated The motor thermal overload will generate a fault at lower levels of current Motor OL Factor Default Sets the operating level for the motor Min Max overload Units Motor OL _ Operating FLA Factor Level Motor Poles Default Defines the number of poles in the motor Min Max Units SEELE Torque Perf Mode Default Sets the method of motor torque Options production Motor Cntl Sel Default Sets the method of motor control used in Options the drive Important FVC Vector mode requires autotuning of the motor both coupled and uncoupled to the load Maximum Voltage Default Sets the highest voltage the drive will Min Max output Units Based on Drive Rating 0 00 100 00 0 00 1000 00 0 01 kW HP See Mtr NP Pwr Units Drive Rating Based 0 Horsepower 1 kiloWatts Drive Rating Based Horsepower kiloWatts Convert HP Convert kW Ceo n Cc Motor NP Hz 3 0 0 Motor NP Hz 0 1 Hz 1 00 0 20 2 00 0 01 4 2 40 1 Pole O0 Sensrls Vect Sensrls Vect SV Economize Custom V Hz Fan Pmp V Hz Sensris Vect Sensrls Vect SV Economize Custom V Hz Fan Pmp V Hz FVC Vector Drive Rated Volts Rated V
233. present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W SenrEr Y Commanded Freq Value of the active frequency command Commanded Speed Value of the active Speed Frequency Reference Displayed in Hz or RPM depending on value of Speed Units Output Current The total output current present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V 8 W Torque Current Based on the motor the amount of current that is in phase with the fundamental voltage component Flux Current Amount of current that is out of phase with the fundamental voltage component Output Voltage Output voltage present at terminals T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Output Power Output power present at T1 T2 amp T3 U V amp W Output Powr Fctr Output power factor Elapsed MWh Accumulated output energy of the drive Elapsed Run Time Accumulated time drive is outputting power Values Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Default Min Max Units Read Only Maximum Freq 0 1 Hz Read Only Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz Read Only Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM Read Only 0 0 Drive Rated Amps x 2 0 1 Amps Read Only Drive Rating x 2 2
234. prompts you for information that is needed to start up a drive for most applications such as line and motor data commonly adjusted parameters and I O The Vector Control option provides two levels of Assisted Start Up Basic and Detailed See page 2 4 e Lifting Torque Proving Start Up Torque Proving applications can use the Assisted Start Up to tune the motor However it is recommended that the motor be disconnected from the hoist crane equipment during the routine If this is not possible refer to the manual tuning procedure on page C 2 Figure 2 2 Standard Control Option Start Up Menu Main Menu Motor Data and Motor Tests UI Speed Limits Speed Control Start Stop O Done Ramp Times Exit Enter Motor NP Optimize Torque Set Min Max Configure Configure Data Stop Mode and Speed and Source Value Control Method Accel Decel Verify Direction Direction Control and Scale for 2 Wire 3 Wire I O Ramp Times Speed References Digital Inputs Outputs and Analog Outputs Important Information Power must be applied to the drive when viewing or changing parameters Previous programming may affect the drive status and operation when power is applied If the I O Cassette has been changed a Reset Defaults operation must be performed Figure 2 3 Vector Control Option Start Up Menu Main Menu Motor Control Motor Data and Motor Tests m Speed Limits Speed Torque Start Stop l O Application Done Select Ramp Times Control Exit
235. psed MWh Metering 3 12 91 94 Speed Ref X Hi Speed Reference 3 24 10 Elapsed Run Time Metering 3 12 92 95 Speed Ref X Lo Speed Reference 3 24 11 MOP Frequency Metering 3 13 9 TB Man Ref Sel Speed Reference 3 25 MOP Reference Metering 97 TB Man Ref Hi Speed Reference 3 25 12 DC Bus Voltage Metering 3 13 98 TB Man Ref Lo Speed Reference 3 25 014 Elapsed kWh Metering 3 13 99 Pulse Input Ref Speed Reference 3 25 13 DC Bus Memory Metering 3 13 100 Jog Speed Discrete Speeds 3 25 16 Analog In Value Metering 3 13 Jog Speed 1 Discrete Speeds 17 Analog In2 Value Metering 3 13 101 107 Preset Speed X Discrete Speeds 3 25 22 Ramped Speed Metering 3 13 108 Jog Speed 2 Discrete Speeds 3 25 23 Speed Reference Metering 3 13 116 Trim Setpoint Speed Trim 3 26 24 Commanded Torque Metering 3 13 117 Trim In Select Speed Trim 3 26 25 Speed Feedback Metering 3 13 118 Trim Out Select Speed Trim 3 26 26 Rated kW Drive Data 3 14 119 Trim Hi Speed Trim 3 26 27 Rated Volts Drive Data 3 14 120 Trim Lo Speed Trim 3 26 28 Rated Amps Drive Data 3 14 121 Slip RPM FLA Slip Comp 3 26 29 Control SW Ver Drive Data 3 14 122 Slip Comp Gain Slip Comp 3 26 40 Motor Type Motor Data 3 14 123 Slip RPM Meter Slip Comp 3 26 41 Motor NP Volts Motor Data 3 14 124 PI Configuration Process Pl 3 27 42 Motor NP FLA Motor Data 3 14 125 PI Control Process Pl 3 27 43 Motor NP Hertz Motor Data 3 14 126 Pl Reference Sel Process Pl 3 27 44 Motor NP RPM Motor Data 3 14
236. put goes to zero off Drive outputs DC voltage on the last used phase at the level programmed in DC Brake Level Par 158 This voltage causes a stopping brake torque If the voltage is applied for a time that is longer than the actual possible stopping time the remaining time will be used to attempt to hold the motor at zero speed DC voltage to the motor continues for the amount of time programmed in DC Brake Time Par 159 Braking ceases after this time expires After the DC Braking ceases no further power is supplied to the motor The motor may or may not be stopped The drive has released control The motor if rotating will coast from its present speed for a time that is dependent on the mechanics of the system inertia friction etc Mode Ramp to Stop De Application Notes C 23 scription Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed N Output Current k N Output Voltage H SES gt Hold B Level Time Th 1 stop Zero ADC Hold Time gt Command Command Speed is method uses drive output reduction to stop the load On Stop drive output will decrease according to the programmed pattern from its present value to zero The pattern may be linear or squared The output will decrease to zero at the rate determined by the programmed Maximum Freq and the programmed active Decel Time x The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such a
237. r PI Fdback Meter PI Error Meter PI Output Meter S Curve 134 135 136 137 138 146 Load Limits Current Lmt Sel 147 Current Lmt Val 148 Current Lmt Gain 149 Drive OL Mode 150 PWM Frequency 151 Stop Brake Modes Stop Mode A 155 Stop Mode B 156 DC Brake Lvl Sel 157 DC Brake Level 158 DC Brake Time 159 Bus Reg Ki 160 Bus RegModeA 161 Bus Reg Mode B 162 DB Resistor Type Bus Reg Kp Bus Reg Kd 163 164 165 Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Flying Start En 169 Flying StartGain 170 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Sleep Wake Mode 178 Sleep Wake Ref 179 Wake Level 180 Wake Time Sleep Level Sleep Time 181 182 183 Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss Time 185 Power Loss Level 186 Programming and Parameters 3 7 File Group Parameters Utility Direction Config Direction Mode 190 HIM Ref Config Save HIM Ref 192 Man Ref Preload 193 MOP Config Save MOP Ref 194 MOP Rate 195 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Save To User Set 199 Voltage Class 202 Reset To Defalts 197 Reset Meters 200 Drive Checksum 202 Load Frm Usr Set 198 Language 201 Diagnostics Drive Status 1 209 Dig Out Status 217 Status 2 Fault 228 Drive Status 2 210 Drive Temp 218 Alarm 1 Fault 229 Drive Alarm 1 211 Drive OL Count 219 Alarm 2 Fault 230 Drive Alarm 2 212 Motor OL Count 220 Testpoint 1 Gel 234 Speed Ref Source 213 Fault Speed 224 Testpoint 1 Data 235
238. red when the condition that caused the Fault numbers not listed are reserved for future use alarm is no longer present 4 10 Troubleshooting Alarm Descriptions Table 4 C Alarm Descriptions and Actions Alarm Analog In Loss Bipolar Conflict Brake Slipped Decel Inhibt Dig In ConflictA Dig In ConflictB Dig In ConflictC Drive OL Level 1 o E 5 10 17 Q Type O Description An analog input is configured for Alarm on signal loss and signal loss has occurred Parameter 190 Direction Mode is set to Bipolar or Reverse Dis and one or more of the following digital input functions is configured Fwd Reverse Run Forward Run Reverse Jog Forward or Jog Reverse Encoder movement has exceeded the level in BrkSlipCount after the brake was set Drive is being inhibited from decelerating cause an alarm Jog 1 and Jog 2 with Vector Control Option Acc2 Dec2 Accel 2 Decel 2 Jog Jog Fwd Jog Rev Fwd Rev Acc2 Dec2 Accel 2 Decel 2 Jog JR Jog Fwd EE Jog Rev Fwd Rev amp E A digital Start input has been configured without a Stop input or other functions are in conflict Combinations that conflict are marked with a 2 and will cause an alarm Jog 1 and Jog 2 with Vector Control Option Stop Fwd Start CF Run Run Fwd Run
239. removed requires the use of some type of AC line monitoring as well as control of the Precharge Enable signal Consult the factory for additional guidance Summary of Changes The information below summarizes the changes to the PowerFlex 700 User Manual publication 20B UMOO01 since the last release Manual Updates Change Page Bypass Attention statement added P 3 Catalog Number Explanation updated P 4 Mounting section updated 12 Shield Termination description updated 14 Power Terminal Block Specifications updated 1 9 Recommended Signal Wire table updated 1 15 CE General Notes amp Table 1 1 updated 1 25 Flashing Drive Stopped Status Indicator updated 2 2 amp 4 2 Dig Out Setpt description updated 3 58 Decel Inhibit Action 3 updated 4 5 Sound Pressure specification added A 2 Motor Starter catalog numbers updated A 8 through A 12 soc ii Summary of Changes Notes Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Appendices Overview Installation Wiring Start Up Programming and Parameters Troubleshooting See Next Page Table of Contents Who Should Use this Manual P 1 What Is Not in this Manual P 1 Reference Materials P 2 Manual Conventions P 2 Dive lirio MES o000005090036005900 P 3 General Precautions ae ee P 3 Catalog Number Explanation P 4 Eleng 1 1 Mounting Considerati
240. rer as having coverage of at least 75 An additional foil shield can greatly improve noise containment A good example of recommended cable is Belden 295xx xx determines gauge This cable has four 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a 100 coverage foil and an 85 coverage copper braided shield with drain wire surrounded by a PVC jacket Other types of shielded cable are available but the selection of these types may limit the allowable cable length Particularly some of the newer cables twist 4 conductors of THHN wire and wrap them tightly with a foil shield This construction can greatly increase the cable charging current required and reduce the overall drive performance Unless specified in the individual distance tables as tested with the drive these cables are not recommended and their performance against the lead length limits supplied is not known See Table 1 B Table 1 B Recommended Shielded Wire Rating Type Description 600V 90 C 194 F e Four tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation XHHW2 RHW 2 e Copper braid aluminum foil combination shield and tinned copper drain wire e PVC jacket Installation Wiring 1 7 Location Rating Type Description Standard Tray rated 600V 90 C e Three tinned copper conductors with XLPE insulation Option 2 194 F RHH RHW 2 e 5 mil single helical copper tape 25 overlap min with Anixter OLF 7xxxxx or three bare copper grounds in contact with shield equival
241. rmissives Met All Start Permissives Met A 1 No fault conditions present 1 No fault conditions present No 2 No Type 2 alarm conditions present 2 No Type 2 alarm conditions present No CH 3 The terminal block programmed 3 The terminal block programmed enable input is closed enable input is closed 4 The Stop input from all sources is y 4 The Stop input from all sources is l received received Yes Yes No Is the terminal block Run Is the terminal block Run No Run Forward or Run Reverse Run Forward or Run Reverse Input Closed Input Closed Yes Yes Y Powerup Start Powerup Terminated Powerup Start Powerup Terminated Normal Mode Normal Mode C 22 Application Notes Stop Mode Mode Description Coastto P Stop utput Voltage Output Current KEE E LP lt Coast Time is load dependent _ gt ee Command This method releases the motor and allows the load to stop by friction 1 On Stop the drive output goes immediately to zero off 2 No further power is supplied to the motor The drive has released control 3 The motor will coast for a time that is dependent on the mechanics of the system inertia friction etc Brake to Sto p A Output Voltage Output Current Motor Speed A DC Hold Level B C Ix DC Hold Time gt gt Time stop A Command This method uses DC injection of the motor to Stop and or hold the load On Stop 3 phase drive out
242. rogrammed as Enable This will cause the drive to execute a coast to stop cease output whenever an output contactor is opened A Installation Wiring 1 13 Bypass Contactor Precaution ATTENTION An incorrectly applied or installed bypass system can result in component damage or reduction in product life The most common causes are e Wiring AC line to drive output or control terminals e Improper bypass or output circuits not approved by Allen Bradley e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring Disconnecting MOVs and Common Mode Capacitors PowerFlex 700 drives contain protective MOVs and common mode capacitors that are referenced to ground To guard against drive damage these devices should be disconnected if the drive is installed on an ungrounded distribution system where the line to ground voltages on any phase could exceed 125 of the nominal line to line voltage To disconnect these devices remove the jumper s listed in Table 1 D Jumpers can be removed by carefully pulling the jumper straight out See Wiring and Grounding Guidelines for PWM AC Drives publication DRIVES INO01 for more information on ungrounded systems ATTENTION To avoid an electric shock hazard verify that the voltage on the bus capacitors has discharged before removing installing jumpers Measure the DC bus voltage at the DC amp DC terminals of the Power Term
243. rols which adapters can clear a fault an 3 284 MOP Mask See Logic Mask 288 S Sen Controls which adapters can issue MOP thru 2 e commands to the drive 297 EJ 2 285 Local Mask See Logic Mask 288 eo E 9 Controls which adapters are allowed to thru d take exclusive control of drive logic BH commands except stop Exclusive local control can only be taken while the drive is stopped 288 Stop Owner Read Only 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a valid stop thru command 285 S X XIX X X X X X X x 0 0 0 0 0 1 Ver Dead IR 1418 12 1110 9 8 7 6 5 4 8 2 1 0 xZReserved Bit 289 Start Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a 1 valid start command a 290 Jog Owner See Stop Owner 276 Adapters that are presently issuing a SE valid jog command 285 3 52 7 F4 e T e F4 5 e o Masks amp Owners Programming and Parameters No 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 300 301 302 303 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Direction Owner Adapter that currently has exclusive control of direction changes Reference Owner Adapter that has the exclusive control of the command frequency source selection Accel Owner Adapter that has exclusive control of selecting Accel Time 1 2 Decel Owner Adapter that has exclusive control of selecting Decel Time 1 2 Fault Cir Owner
244. rque Ref B Mult Torq Attributes 3 18 435 Torque Setpoint Torq Attributes 3 19 436 Pos Torque Limit Torq Attributes 3 19 437 Neg Torque Limit Torq Attributes 3 19 438 Torque Setpoint2 Torq Attributes 3 19 440 Control Status Torq Attributes 3 19 441 Mtr Tor Cur Ref Torq Attributes 3 19 445 Ki Speed Loop Speed Regulator 3 29 446 Kp Speed Loop Speed Regulator 3 30 447 Kf Speed Loop Speed Regulator 3 30 449 Speed Desired BW Speed Regulator 3 30 450 Total Inertia Speed Regulator 3 30 451 Speed Loop Meter Speed Regulator 3 30 454 Rev Speed Limit Speed Regulator 3 23 459 PI Deriv Time Process Pl 3 29 460 Pl Reference Hi Process Pl 3 29 461 Pl Reference Lo Process Pl 3 29 462 PI Feedback Hi Process Pl 3 29 463 PI Feedback Lo Process Pl 3 29 476 494 ScaleX In Value Scaled Blocks 3 48 477 495 ScaleX In Hi Scaled Blocks 3 48 478 496 ScaleX In Lo Scaled Blocks 3 48 479 497 ScaleX Out Hi Scaled Blocks 3 48 480 498 ScaleX Out Lo Scaled Blocks 3 48 481 499 ScaleX Out Value Scaled Blocks 3 48 600 TorqProve Cnfg Torq Proving 3 59 601 TorqProve Setup Torq Proving 3 59 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting Chapter 4 provides information to guide you in troubleshooting the PowerFlex 700 Included is a listing and description of drive faults with possible solutions when applicable and alarms For information on See page Faults and Alarms 4 1
245. s Dig Out2 OnTime 0 00 Secs Dig Out3 OnTime Min Max 0 00 600 00 Secs Sets the ON Delay time for the digital Units 0 01 Secs outputs This is the time between the occurrence of a condition and activation of the relay Dig Out1 OffTime Default 0 00 Secs Dig Out2 OffTime 0 00 Secs Dig Out3 OffTime wes 0 00 600 00 Secs Sets the OFF Delay time for the digital Units 0 01 Secs outputs This is the time between the disappearance of a condition and de activation of the relay Applications File 600 60 Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values TorqProve Cnfg Enables disables torque brake proving feature When Enabled Digital Out1 Sel becomes the brake control Note this value is not changed when parameters are reset to factory defaults page 3 40 ES E xixixix ixixixix x xix xixixix 0 Farbe farc 87654832410 x Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values TorqProve Setup Allows control of specific torque proving functions through a communication device ey SE X XIXI XIX X X X X X X X X X 0 0 Uez L 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Reserved Bit Factory Default Bit Values 3 59 Related Ka IGO Io Ka IGO I Related 3 60 File Applications Torque Proving Group N
246. s Speed Ref B Sel 093 Speed Ref A Lo 092 TB Man Ref Hi 097 Speed Ref A H 091 Speed RefBLo 095 TB Man Het Lo 098 c Discrete Jog Speed 100 E Speeds Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Dynamic Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 140 Decel Time 1 142 S Curve 146 Control Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 2 143 A Load Limits Current Lmt Gel 147 Tse Current Lmt Val 148 Stop Brake Stop Mode A 155 DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Bus Reg Mode A 161 Modes Stop Mode B 156 DC Brake Level 158 Bus Reg Mode B 162 ls DC Brake Time 159 DB Resistor Type 163 Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss Time 185 Direction Config Direction Mode 190 Drive Memory Param Access Lvl 196 Save To User Set 199 Reset To Defalts 197 Language 201 Load Frm Usr Set 198 Faults Fault Config 1 238 Inputs amp Analog Inputs Anlg In Config 320 Analog Int Lo 323 Outputs Analog In1 Hi 322 Analog In2 Lo 326 Analog In2 Hi 325 Analog Outputs Analog Out Sel 342 Analog Out Hi 343 Analog Out Lo 344 Digital Inputs Digital In1 6 Sel 361 366 Digital Outputs Digital Out Sel 380 Dig Outi Level 381 Digital Out2 Sel 384 Dig Out2 Level 385 Programming and Parameters 3 5 Basic Parameter View Vector Control Option Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 0 Basic File Group Parameters Monitor Metering Output Freq 001 Commanded Speed002 Commanded Torque 024 Output Current 003 Torque Curren
247. s a not ready state until the enable is restored C 24 Application Notes Voltage Tolerance Nominal Line Nominal Motor Drive Full Power Drive Operating Drive Rating Voltage Voltage Range Range 200 240 200 200 200 264 180 264 208 208 208 264 240 230 230 264 380 400 380 380 380 528 342 528 400 400 400 528 480 460 460 528 500 600 600 575 575 660 432 660 Frames 0 4 Only 500 690 600 575 575 660 475 759 Frames 5 6 Only 690 690 690 759 475 759 Drive Full Power Range Nominal Motor Voltage to Drive Rated Voltage 10 Rated power is available across the entire Drive Full Power Range Drive Operating Range Lowest Nominal Motor Voltage 10 to Drive Rated Voltage 10 HP Motor Drive Output Example Drive Output is linearly derated when Actual Line Voltage is less than the Nominal Motor Voltage Derated Power Range lt Full Power Range eh Drive Operating Range Nominal Motor Voltage 10 Nominal Motor Voltage Drive Rated Voltage gt t Actual Line Voltage Drive Input Drive Rated Voltage 10 gt Calculate the maximum power of a 5 HP 460V motor connected to a 480V rated drive supplied with 342V Actual Line Voltage input e Actual Line Voltage Nominal Motor Voltage 74 3 e 74 3 x 5HP 44 6 Hz 74 3 x 60 Hz 3 7 HP At 342V Actual Line Voltage the maximum power the 5 HP 460V motor
248. s such as bus or current regulation When the output reaches zero the output is shut off 4 The motor if rotating will coast from its present speed for a time that is dependent on the mechanics of the system inertia friction etc Ramp to Hold A Output Voltage Output Voltage Output Current Output Current Motor Speed Th Ed Stop Zero Re issuing a Command Command Start Command Speed is method combines two of the methods above It uses drive output reduction to stop the load and DC injection to hold the load at zero speed once it has stopped 1 On Stop drive output will decrease according to the programmed pattern from its present value to zero The pattern may be linear or squared The output will decrease to zero at the rate determined by the programmed Maximum Freq and the programmed active Decel Time x The reduction in output can be limited by other drive factors such as bus or current regulation When the output reaches zero 3 phase drive output goes to zero off and the drive outputs DC voltage on the last used phase at the level programmed in DC Brake Level Par 158 This voltage causes a holding brake torque DC voltage to the motor continues until a Start command is reissued or the drive is disabled If a Start command is reissued DC Braking ceases and he drive returns to normal AC operation If an Enable command is removed the drive enter
249. ss 3 38 273 Drive Ramp Rslt Comm Control 3 49 190 Direction Mode Direction Config 3 38 274 DPI Port Sel Comm Control 3 50 192 Save HIM Ref HIM Ref Config 3 39 275 DPI Port Value Comm Control 3 50 193 Man Ref Preload HIM Ref Config 3 39 276 Logic Mask Masks amp Owners 3 50 194 Save MOP Ref MOP Config 3 39 277 Start Mask Masks amp Owners 3 50 195 MOP Rate MOP Config 3 39 278 Jog Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 196 Param Access Lvl Drive Memory 3 39 279 Direction Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 197 Reset To Defalts Drive Memory 3 40 280 Reference Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 198 Load Frm Usr Set Drive Memory 3 40 281 Accel Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 199 Save To User Set Drive Memory 3 40 282 Decel Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 200 Reset Meters Drive Memory 3 40 283 Fault Clr Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 201 Language Drive Memory 3 40 284 MOP Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 202 Voltage Class Drive Memory 3 40 285 Local Mask Masks amp Owners 3 51 203 Drive Checksum Drive Memory 3 41 288 Stop Owner Masks amp Owners 3 51 209 210 Drive Status X Diagnostics 3 41 289 Start Owner Masks amp Owners 3 51 211 212 Drive Alarm X Diagnostics 341 290 Jog Owner Masks amp Owners 3 51 213 Speed Ref Source Diagnostics 3 42 291 Direction Owner Masks 8 Owners 3 52 214 Start Inhibits Diagnostics 3 42 292 Reference Owner Masks amp Owners 3 52 215 Last Stop Source Diagnostics 3 43 293 Accel Owner Masks amp Owners
250. sulting in possible device damage Also see E ATTENTION above El 164 Bus Reg Kp Default 1500 Proportional gain for the bus regulator Min Max 0 10000 Used to adjust regulator response Units 1 165 Bus Reg Kd Default 1000 Derivative gain for the bus regulator Min Max 0 10000 Used to control regulator overshoot Units 1 166 Flux Braking Default 0 Disabled Set to use an increase in the motor flux Options 0 Disabled current to increase the motor losses and 1 Enabled allow a faster deceleration time when a chopper brake or regenerative capability is not available Can be used as a e stopping or fast deceleration method 167 Powerup Delay Default 0 0 Secs Defines the programmed delay time in Min Max 0 0 30 0 Secs seconds before a start command is Units 0 1 Secs accepted after a power up 168 Start At PowerUp Default 0 Disabled 2 Enables disables a feature to issue a Options 0 Disabled 3 Start or Run command and automatically 1 Enabled 1 resume running at commanded speed S after drive input power is restored e Requires a digital input configured for Run or Start and a valid start contact ATTENTION Equipment damage and or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application Do not use this function without considering applicable local national and international codes standards regulations or industry guidelines File Gr
251. t the time of the last fault Vector firmware 3 e llo 001 amp later 1 Condition True 0 Condition False x Reserved Related gt Ka IS LE Co IND IND A File Programming and Parameters Parameter Name A Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values Alarm 1 Fault Captures and displays Drive Alarm 1 at the time of the last fault 22 co Read Only o 1 Condition True 0 0 Condition False x Reserved X ig 151 Bit Vector firmware 3 Alarm 2 Fault Captures and displays Drive Alarm 2 at the time of the last fault Q S So B D g 230 IND Gei INN Read Only R IND gt IND Ge eg UTILITY Diagnostics 234 236 235 237 V 0 Condition False x Reserved 0 0 1 Condition True 10 Es SS S A Ce S X X X X X X X X X X X x xix 0 1 Condition True X 23 22 21 20 PS 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 19 18 17 16 0 Condition False x Reserved Bit Testpoint 1 Sel Testpoint 2 Sel Selects the function whose value is displayed value in Testpoint x Data These are internal values that are not accessible through parameters See Testpoint Codes
252. t PowerFlex 700 Drive Alarm 1 Clr Fault Queue HIM Version Product Data Drive Alarm 2 Reset Device Main Control Board Speed Ref Source Power Unit Board Start Inhibits Last Stop Source LCD HIM Product Data Dig In Status LCD HIM Standard Dig Out Status Control Board Drive Temp Keyboard Numeric Drive OL Count Motor OL Count View selected through D EJ A Y Param Access Lvi Basic O GA FGP K FGP File Advanced Numbered List File 1 Name FGP Group _ Changed File 2 Name Group 1 Name FGP Parameter File 3 Name Group 2 Name Parameter Name Device Select Memory Storage Start Up Preferences SN PowerFlex 700 Connected DPI Devices Group 3 Name Parameter Name Parameter Name gt Value Screen en Him Copycat gt Device gt HIM Device User Sets Drive User Get Device lt HIM Reset To Defaults Save To User Set Delete HIM Set Load Frm Usr Set Active Name Set SA cammie gt Introduction Complete Steps __ Drive Identity Change Password User Dspy Lines User Dspy Time User Dspy Video Reset User Dspy Contrast 1 Input Voltage 2 Motor Dat Ramp 3 Motor Tests 4 Speed Limits Make a selection 5 Speed Control Abort 6 Stri Stop l O Backup 7 Done Exit Resume Start Up Menu Press UY ED to move between menu items Press E to select a menu item Press EB to move 1 level back in
253. t 004 DC Bus Voltage 012 Motor Data Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor OL Hertz 047 Motor NP FLA 042 Motor NP Power 045 Motor Poles 049 Motor NP Hertz 043 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Torq Attributes Motor Cntl Sel 053 Autotune Torque 066 Torque Ref A Lo 429 Maximum Voltage 054 Inertia Autotune 067 Pos Torque Limit 436 Maximum Freq 055 Torque Ref A Sel 427 Neg Torque Limit 437 Autotune 061 Torque Ref A Hi 428 Speed Motor Fdbk Type 412 Encoder PPR 413 Feedback Speed Spd Mode amp Speed Units 079 Minimum Speed 081 Rev Speed Limit 454 Command Limits Feedback Select 080 Maximum Speed 082 Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed RefBHi 094 TB Man Het Lo 098 References Speed Ref AHi 091 Speed RefBLo 095 Pulse Input Ref 099 Speed Dei A Lo 092 TB Man Ref Gel 096 Speed Ref B Sel 093 TB Man Ref Hi 097 Discrete Jog Speed 1 100 Jog Speed 2 108 Speeds Preset Speed 1 7 101 107 Dynamic Ramp Rates Accel Time 1 140 Decel Time 1 142 S Curve 146 Control Accel Time 2 141 Decel Time 2 143 s Load Limits Current Lmt Gel 147 Current Lmt Val 148 Modes Stop Brk Mode B 156 DC Brake Level 158 Bus Reg Mode B 162 Stop Brake Stop Brk Mode A 155 DC Brk Lvl Sel 157 Bus Reg Mode A 161 DC Brake Time 159 DB Resistor Type 163 Restart Modes Start At PowerUp 168 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Power Loss Power Loss Mode 184 Power Loss Time 185 Power Loss Level 186 Direction Config Directi
254. tX Setpt 377 378 Analog Outputs 3 56 DPI Port Value 275 Comm Contro 3 50 Auto Rstrt Delay 175 Restart Modes 3 35 DPI Ref Select 298 Comm Control 3 50 Auto Rstrt Tries 174 Restart Modes 3 35 Drive Alarm X 211 212 Diagnostics 3 41 Autotune 61 Torq Attributes 3 17 Drive Checksum 203 Drive Memory 3 41 Autotune Torque 66 Torq Attributes 3 18 Drive Logic Rslt 271 Comm Contro 3 49 Break Frequency 72 Volts per Hertz 3 20 Drive OL Count 219 Diagnostics 3 43 Break Voltage 71 Volts per Hertz 3 20 Drive OL Mode 150 Load Limits 3 31 Brk Release Time 604 Torg Proving 3 60 Drive Ramp Rslt 273 Comm Control 3 49 Brk Set Time 607 Torq Proving 3 60 Drive Ref Det 272 Comm Control 3 49 Brk Alarm Travel 610 Torq Proving 3 60 Drive Status X 209 210 Diagnostics 3 41 BrkSlip Count 609 Torq Proving 3 60 Drive Temp 218 Diagnostics 3 43 Bus Reg Kd 165 Stop Brake Modes 3 34 Droop RPM FLA 152 Load Limits 3 32 Bus Reg Ki 160 Stop Brake Modes 3 33 Elapsed kWh 014 Metering 3 13 Bus Reg Kp 164 Stop Brake Modes 3 34 Elapsed MWh 9 Metering 3 12 Bus Reg Mode X 161 162 Stop Brake Modes 3 33 Elapsed Run Time 10 Metering 3 12 Commanded Freq 2 Metering 3 12 Enc Position Fdbk 414 Speed Feedback 3 20 Commanded Speed 2 Metering 3 12 Encoder PPR 413 Speed Feedback 3 20 Commanded Torque 24 Metering 3 13 Encoder Speed 415 Speed Feedback 3 20 Compensation 56 Torq Attributes 3 16 Encoder Z Chan 423 Speed Feedback 3 21 Control Status 440 Torq
255. ter 093 01011 raag lod Functions gt A Preset Speed 2 Parameter 102 01110 m al Skip Clamp Preset Speed 3 Parameter 103 A 0 111 ye Direction etc Preset Speed 4 Parameter 104 100 1 Preset Speed 5 Parameter 105 101 Min Max Speed Preset Speed 6 Parameter 106 11 0 1 Commanded A f Preset Speed 7 Parameter 107 111 f Frequency DPI Port Ref 1 6 See Parameter 209 gt DPI Command f Manual Speed Ref Options i Acc pes Hany an HIM Requesting Auto Manual lt lt Man S Curve TB Man Ref Sel Parameter 096 Digital Input 1 Post Ramp Jog Speed Parameter 100 gt Jog Command H to follower drive for Speed Adders Speed Mode Frequency Reference PI Output 2 Process Pi 37 Slip Compensation gt 1 Slip Comp 4 None 0 Open Loop Output Frequency Torque Reference Source Vector Control Option Only The torque reference is normally supplied by an analog input or network reference Switching between available sources while the drive is running is not available Digital inputs programmed as Speed Sel 1 2 3 and the HIM Auto Manual function see above do not affect the active torque reference when the drive is in Vector Control Mode 1 To access Preset Speed 1 set parameter 090 or 093 to Preset Speed 1 Installation Wiring 1 23 Auto Manual Examples PLC Auto HIM Manual A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires man
256. the menu structure Press QB ES to select how to view parameters HIM Overview Diagnostics Menu When a fault trips the drive use this menu to access detailed data about the drive Option Description Faults View fault queue or fault information clear faults or reset drive Status Info View parameters that display status information about the drive Device Version View the firmware version and hardware series of components HIM Version View the firmware version and hardware series of the HIM Parameter Menu Refer to Viewing and Editing Parameters on page B 5 Device Select Menu Use this menu to access parameters in connected peripheral devices Memory Storage Menu Drive data can be saved to or recalled from User and HIM sets User sets are files stored in permanent nonvolatile drive memory HIM sets are files stored in permanent nonvolatile HIM memory Option HIM Copycat Device gt HIM Device lt HIM Description Save data to a HIM set load data from a HIM set to active drive memory or delete a HIM set Device User Sets Save data to a User set load data from a User set to active drive memory or name a User set Reset To Defaults Start Up Menu See Chapter 2 Preferences Menu Restore the drive to its factory default settings The HIM and drive have features that you can customize Option Drive Identity Description Add text to identify the drive Change Passwor
257. tion at lower speeds typically not needed Mtr Lead Rev Reverses the phase rotation of the applied voltage effectively reversing the motor leads PWM Freq Lock Keeps the PWM frequency from decreasing to 2 kHz at low operating frequencies in FVC Vector mode without encoder Flux Up Mode Default 0 Manual Auto Flux is established for a calculated Options 0 Manual time period based on motor nameplate 1 Automatic data Flux Up Time is not used Manual Flux is established for Flux Up Time before acceleration Flux Up Time Default 0 00 Secs Sets the amount of time the drive will use 0 0 Secs to try and achieve full motor stator flux Min Max 0 00 5 00 Secs When a Start command is issued DC 0 0 5 0 Secs current at current limit level is used to 0 000 5 000 Secs MEM build stator flux before accelerating Units 0 01 Secs 0 1 Secs 0 001 Secs SV Boost Filter Default 500 Sets the amount of filtering used to boost Min Max 0 32767 voltage during Sensorless Vector and Units 1 FVC Vector encoderless operation Related 5 de o SA IG I gt Gn Ico o SA I2 Io Gn ico Group File No MOTOR CONTROL Torq Attributes 06 062 Programming and Parameters Parameter Name amp Description See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Autotune Default Values Calculate 3 Provides a manual or automatic method Options 0 Re
258. to excessive regenerated energy or Faulted 162 and add a dynamic brake unstable AC line input voltages inter lititi r h It Rx 4 Correct AC input line instability or add an Merna amer nas na deg ative isolation transformer operation p 5 Reset drive 4 16 Troubleshooting Testpoint Codes and Functions Select testpoint with Testpoint x Sel parameters 234 236 Values can be viewed with Testpoint x Data parameters 235 237 Values No Description Units Minimum Maximum Default 01 DPI Error Status 1 0 255 0 02 Heatsink Temp 0 1 degC 100 0 100 0 0 03 Active Cur Limit 1 0 32767 0 04 Active PWM Freq 1 Hz 2 10 4 05 Life MegaWatt H 0 0001 MWh 0 214748 3647 0 06 Life Run Time 0 0001 Hrs 10 214748 3647 0 07 Life Pwr Up Time 0 0001 Hrs 0 214748 3647 0 08 Life Pwr Cycles 1 0 4294967295 0 09 Life MW HR Fract 1 0 4294967295 0 10 MW HR Frac Unit 1 0 4294967295 0 11 MCB Life Time 0 0001 Hrs 10 214748 3647 0 12 Raw Analog In 1 1 0 0 13 Raw Analog In 2 1 0 0 16 CS Msg Rx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 17 CS Msg Tx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 18 CS Timeout Ont 1 0 255 0 19 CS Msg Bad Cnt 1 0 255 0 22 PC Msg Rx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 23 PC Msg Tx Cnt 1 0 65535 0 24 29 PC1 6 Timeout Cnt 1 0 255 0 30 CAN BusOff Cnt 1 0 65535 0 31 No of Analog Inputs 1 0 X 0 32 Raw Temperature 1 0 65535 0 33 MTO Norm Mtr Amp 0 1 Amps 0 65535 0 34 DTO Cmd Frequency 1 0 420
259. tput frequency when a jog command is issued Jog Speed 1 Sets the output frequency when Jog Speed 1 is selected Preset Speed 1 Preset Speed 2 Preset Speed 3 Preset Speed 4 Preset Speed 5 Preset Speed 6 Preset Speed 7 Provides an internal fixed speed command value In bipolar mode direction is commanded by the sign of the reference Jog Speed 2 Sets the output frequency when Jog Speed 2 is selected Programming and Parameters Values Default Options Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Default Units Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min Max 1 Analog In 1 1 Analog In 1 2 Analog In 2 1 3 8 Reserved 9 MOP Level Maximum Speed Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM 0 0 Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 0 01 RPM Read Only 420 0 Hz 25200 0 RPM 0 1 Hz 0 1 RPM 10 0 Hz Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 10 0 Hz 300 0 RPM Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM 5 0 Hz 150 RPM 10 0 Hz 300 RPM 20 0 Hz 600 RPM 30 0 Hz 900 RPM 40 0 Hz 1200 RPM 50 0 Hz 1500 RPM 60 0 Hz 1800 RPM Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM 10 0 Hz 300 0 RPM Maximum Speed 0 1 Hz 1 RPM 3 25 Related o O N o cO Ico o Ga Ico I gt O IO Io Z Ico I gt O et KO Y Ico o Z Ico
260. tune Stop BRK Mode X 69 Start Acc Boost 157 DC Brk Lvl Sel 70 Run Boost 158 DC Brake Level 7i Break Voltage 159 DC Brake Time 72 Break Frequency 160 Bus Reg Ki 79 Speed Units 161 162 Bus Reg Mode X 80 Feedback Select 163 DB Resistor Type Speed Mode 164 Bus Reg Kp 81 Minimum Speed 165 Bus Reg Kd 82 Maximum Speed 166 Flux Braking 83 Overspeed Limit 167 Powerup Delay 84 86 Skip Frequency X 168 Start At PowerUp 87 Skip Freq Band 169 Flying Start En 88 Speed Torque Mod 170 Flying StartGain 90 93 Speed Ref X Sel 174 Auto Rstrt Tries 91 94 Speed Ref X Hi 175 Auto Rstrt Delay 92 95 Speed Ref X Lo 177 Gnd Warn Level 96 TB Man Ref Sel 178 Sleep Wake Mode 97 TB Man Ref Hi 179 Sleep Wake Ref 98 TB Man Ref Lo 180 Wake Leve 100 Jog Speed 181 Wake Time Jog Speed 1 182 Sleep Leve 101 107 Preset Speed X 183 Sleep Time 108 Jog Speed 2 184 Power Loss Mode 116 Trim Setpoint 185 Power Loss Time 117 Trim In Select 186 Power Loss Level 118 Trim Out Select 187 Load Loss Level 119 Trim Hi 188 Load Loss Time 120 Trim Lo 189 Shear Pin Time 121 Slip RPM FLA 190 Direction Mode 122 Slip Comp Gain 192 Save HIM Ref 124 PI Configuration 193 Man Ref Preload Number Parameter Name Setting Number Parameter Name Setting 194 Save MOP Ref 423 Encoder Z C
261. ual control from the HIM during set up The Auto speed reference is issued by the PLC through a communications module installed in the drive Since the internal communications is designated as Port 5 Speed Ref A Sel is set to DPI Port 5 with the drive running from the Auto source Attain Manual Control e Press ALT then Auto Man on the HIM When the HIM attains manual control the drive speed command comes from the HIM speed control keys or analog potentiometer Release to Auto Control e Press ALT then Auto Man on the HIM again When the HIM releases manual control the drive speed command returns to the PLC PLC Auto Terminal Block Manual A process is run by a PLC when in Auto mode and requires manual control from an analog potentiometer wired to the drive terminal block The auto speed reference is issued by the PLC through a communications module installed in the drive Since the internal communications is designated as Port 5 Speed Ref A Sel is set to DPI Port 5 with the drive running from the Auto source Since the Manual speed reference is issued by an analog input Analog In 1 or 2 TB Man Ref Sel is set to the same input To switch between Auto and Manual Digital In4 Sel is set to Auto Manual Attain Manual Control e Close the digital input With the input closed the speed command comes from the pot Release to Auto Control e Open the digital input With the input open the sp
262. us 1 2 209 210 Dig Out Status 217 Fault Bus Volts 226 Drive Alarm 1 2 211 212 Drive Temp 218 Status 1 2 Fault 227 228 Speed Ref Source 213 Drive OL Count 219 Alarm 1 2 Fault 229 230 Start Inhibits 214 Motor OL Count 220 Testpoint 1 2 Sel 234 236 Last Stop Source 215 Fault Speed 224 Testpoint 1 2 Data 235 237 Dig In Status 216 Fault Amps 225 Faults Fault Config 1 238 Fault Clear Mode 241 Fault 1 8 Code 243 257 Fault Clear 240 Power Up Marker 242 Fault 1 8 Time 244 258 Alarms Alarm Configi 259 Alarm Clear 261 Alarm1 8 Code 262 269 Scaled Blocks Scale1 2 In Val 476 482 Scale1 2InLo 478 484 Scale1 2 Out Lo 480 486 Scale3 4 In Val 488 4943X Scale3 4 In Lo 490 4963 Scale3 4 Out Lo 492 4885 Scale1 2 In Hi 477 483 Scale1 2 Out Hi 479 485 Scale1 2 Out Val 481 487 Scale3 4 In Hi 489 4953 Scale3 4 Out Hi 491 4979 Scale3 4 Out Val 493 4993 Communication Comm Control DPI Baud Rate 270 Drive Ref Rslt 272 DPI Port Sel 274 Drive Logic Rslt 271 Drive Ramp Rslt 273 DPI Port Value 275 Masks amp Logic Mask 276 MOP Mask 284 Decel Owner 294 Owners Start Mask 277 Local Mask 285 Fault Clr Owner 295 Jog Mask 278 Stop Owner 288 MOP Owner 296 Direction Mask 279 Start Owner 289 Local Owner 297 Reference Mask 280 Jog Owner 290 DPI Ref Select 2983x Accel Mask 281 Direction Owner 291 DPI Fdbk Select 2993x Decel Mask 282 Reference Owner 292 Fault ClIr Mask 283 Accel Owner 293 Datalinks Data In A1 D2 300 307 Data Out A1 D2 310 317
263. us Reg Kp Stop Brake Modes 3 34 245 Fault 2 Code Faults 3 46 165 Bus Reg Kd Stop Brake Modes 3 34 246 Fault 2 Time Faults 3 47 166 Flux Braking Stop Brake Modes 3 34 247 Fault 3 Code Faults 3 46 167 Powerup Delay Restart Modes 3 34 248 Fault 3 Time Faults 3 47 168 Start At PowerUp Restart Modes 3 34 249 Fault 4 Code Faults 3 46 169 Flying Start En Restart Modes 3 35 250 Fault 4 Time Faults 3 47 170 Flying StartGain Restart Modes 3 35 251 Fault 5 Code Faults 3 46 174 Auto Rstrt Tries Restart Modes 3 35 252 Fault 5 Time Faults 3 47 175 Auto Rstrt Delay Restart Modes 3 35 253 Fault 6 Code Faults 3 46 177 Gnd Warn Level Power Loss 3 37 254 Fault 6 Time Faults 3 47 178 Sleep Wake Mode Restart Modes 3 36 255 Fault 7 Code Faults 3 46 179 Sleep Wake Ref Restart Modes 3 37 256 Fault 7 Time Faults 3 47 180 Wake Level Restart Modes 3 37 257 Fault 8 Code Faults 3 46 181 Wake Time Restart Modes 3 37 258 Fault 8 Time Faults 3 47 182 Sleep Leve Restart Modes 3 37 259 Alarm Config 1 Alarms 3 47 183 Sleep Time Restart Modes 3 37 261 Alarm Clear Alarms 3 47 184 Power Loss Mode Power Loss 3 37 262 269 Alarm X Code Alarms 3 47 185 Power Loss Time Power Loss 3 37 270 DPI Baud Rate Comm Control 3 49 186 Power Loss Level Power Loss 3 38 DPI Data Rate Comm Control 187 Load Loss Level Power Loss 3 38 271 Drive Logic Rslt Comm Control 3 49 188 Load Loss Time Power Loss 3 38 272 Drive Ref Rslt Comm Control 3 49 189 Shear Pin Time Power Lo
264. y e Output circuits which do not connect directly to the motor Contact Allen Bradley for assistance with application or wiring P 4 A A Overview ATTENTION The adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations overhauling loads and eccentric loads It forces the output frequency to be greater than commanded frequency while the drive s bus voltage is increasing towards levels that would otherwise cause a fault However it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur 1 Fast positive changes in input voltage more than a 10 increase within 6 minutes can cause uncommanded positive speed changes However an OverSpeed Limit fault will occur if the speed reaches Max Speed Overspeed Limit If this condition is unacceptable action should be taken to 1 limit supply voltages within the specification of the drive and 2 limit fast positive input voltage changes to less than 10 Without taking such actions if this operation is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulator function must be disabled see parameters 161 and 162 Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times However a Decel Inhibit fault is generated if the drive stops decelerating altogether If this condition is unacceptable the adjust freq portion of the bus regulat
265. y Drives Technical Support www ab com support abdrives Manual Conventions e In this manual we refer to the PowerFlex 700 Adjustable Frequency AC Drive as drive PowerFlex 700 or PowerFlex 700 Drive e To help differentiate parameter names and LCD display text from other text the following conventions will be used Parameter Names will appear in brackets For example DC Bus Voltage Display Text will appear in quotes For example Enabled e The following words are used throughout the manual to describe an action Word Meaning Can Possible able to do something Cannot Not possible not able to do something May Permitted allowed Must Unavoidable you must do this Shall Required and necessary Should Recommended Should Not Not recommended Pb Pe Pb Overview P 3 Drive Frame Sizes Similar PowerFlex 700 drive sizes are grouped into frame sizes to simplify spare parts ordering dimensioning etc A cross reference of drive catalog numbers and their respective frame size is provided in Appendix A General Precautions ATTENTION This drive contains ESD Electrostatic Discharge sensitive parts and assemblies Static control precautions are required when installing testing servicing or repairing this assembly Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed If you are not familiar with static control procedures reference A B publicat
266. you have available see diagram Vector Contro Option To simplify programming with the Vector Control option the displayed parameters will change according to the selection made with Motor Cntl Sel For example if FVC Vector is selected the parameters associated solely with other operations such as Volts per Hertz or Sensorless Vector will be hidden Refer to pages 3 4 through 3 8 File Group Parameter Order This simplifies programming by grouping parameters that are used for similar functions The parameters are organized into files Each file is divided into groups and each parameter is an element in a group By default the LCD HIM displays parameters by File Group Parameter view Numbered List View All parameters are in numerical order 3 4 Programming and Parameters Basic Parameter View Standard Control Option Parameter 196 Param Access Lvl set to option 0 Basic File Group Monitor Metering Parameters Output Freq 001 Commanded Freq 002 Output Current 002 DC Bus Voltage 012 gt Motor Data Motor NP Volts 041 Motor NP RPM 044 Motor OL Hertz 047 Motor NP FLA 042 Motor NP Power 045 Motor NP Hertz 043 Mtr NP Pwr Units 046 Torq Attributes Torque Perf Mode 053 Maximum Freq 055 Maximum Voltage 054 Autotune 061 Speed Spd Mode amp Minimum Speed 081 Command Limits Maximum Speed 082 KZ Speed Speed Ref A Sel 090 Speed RefBHi 094 TB Man Ref Gel 096 Reference
267. z and changes the value proportionately i e 1800 RPM 60 Hz Convert RPM 3 converts all speed based parameters to RPM and changes the value proportionately SPEED COMMAND Spd Mode Limits 3 22 Programming and Parameters mo o S E Parameter Name Description E it See page 3 2 for symbol descriptions Values 080 KATETE Speed Mode Default 0 Open Loop 412 9 Sets the method of speed regulation Options 0 Open Loop He 1 Slip Comp 2 Process PI Feedback Select Default 0 Open Loop Selects the source for motor speed Options 0 Open Loop feedback Note that all selections are 1 Slip Comp available when using Process PI 2 Reserved Open Loop 0 no encoder is present 3 Encoder and slip compensation is not needed 4 Reserved Slip Comp 1 tight speed control is 5 Simulator needed and encoder is not present Encoder 3 an encoder is present Simulator 5 Simulates a motor for testing drive operation amp interface check 081 Minimum Speed Default 0 0 079 O Sets the low limit for speed reference Min Max 0 0 Maximum Speed after scaling is applied Refer to Units 0 1 Hz 095 parameter 083 Overspeed Limit 0 1 RPM REN E 082 Maximum Speed Default 50 0 or 60 0 Hz volt class 055 Sets the high limit for speed reference Motor SEMI n o a after scaling is applied Refer to Min Max 5 0 400 0 Hz

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

iRT 30 - Buderus  DM1022Q  SHOUT nano USER`S GUIDE - SkyNet Satellite Communications  Samsung GT-S5503 User Manual  Moxa IA260-CE  DELL Latitude E6410 notebook  HREP 4-, 8-, 16-Channel Color DVR Quick Install Guide, SPA  Multi-Media Solutions Digital Signage Platform NDiS 127 User Manual  Laser Safety Manual - University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file